JP2020068843A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest.SOLUTION: In a game machine in which a big winning can be generated on the basis of the fact that game balls enter a V winning port 283 and a big winning probability changes according to the number of support balls held in losing ball holding units 273A to 273E, a CPU103 controls a second special variable winning ball device 7B on the basis of a first pattern in the case of small winnings 1 to 7 and 9 to 11, controls a second special variable winning ball device 7B on the basis of a second pattern in the case of small winnings 8 and 12, and in the second pattern, executes a second control in any case where the game balls (balls to determine winning or losing) pass through the V winning port 283 in the first control and the game balls (balls to determine winning or losing) does not pass through the V winning port 283 in the first control, that is, regardless of whether or not a V winning occurs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine or the like that can give an advantageous value (for example, a jackpot gaming state) to the player based on the fact that the game medium that has entered the predetermined area has passed through the specific area. is there.

  As this type of gaming machine, for example, it is possible to store a game medium guided to a specific path that can pass through a specific area among the game media that have entered a predetermined area, and the predetermined predetermined amount can be stored by the stored game medium. Other game media that have entered the area are guided to a predetermined route, and the ratio of the game media stored in the specific path passing through the specific region is changed by the other game medium guided to the predetermined path. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-213200, A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game media guided to the specific route is monotonous for the win / no lottery, and the interest is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable means (for example, second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, open state) in which a game medium (for example, game ball P) can enter.
A variable control means capable of controlling the variable means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120 shown in FIG. 35);
Equipped with
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second special winning opening 702B),
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided,
It is possible to add an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific region, and the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific region differs depending on the number of game media that have passed through the predetermined region (for example, The opening pattern of the second special winning opening 702B is different depending on the type of small hit, so that the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different and the game balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205 are different. The number of P, that is, the number of support balls held by the missing ball holding units 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes according to this, etc.),
The variable control means,
A first pattern that performs a first control that allows a game medium to pass through the predetermined area, and a second pattern that performs a second control that allows the game medium to pass through the predetermined area again after performing the first control. The variable means can be controlled by any of a plurality of types of patterns including, (for example, the CPU 103, in the small hitting game state, small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and small hits 2, 4, 6). In the case of 10, small hits 7 and 11, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on the first pattern, and in the case of small hits 8 and 12, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is based on the second pattern. Portion for controlling the ball device 7B),
In the second pattern, the second control is performed regardless of whether or not the game medium that has passed the predetermined region by the first control has passed the specific region (for example, the CPU 103, in the second pattern, Whether the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning opening 283 in the first control or the game ball (game ball) does not enter the V winning opening 283 in the first control, that is, the V winning Portion that executes the second control regardless of whether or not occurs (see FIG. 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The storage means (for example, the second storage mechanism 205) capable of storing the game medium (for example, the game ball P) that has passed through the predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B),
The ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening 283) is different depending on the number of the game media stored in the storing means (for example, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 702B according to the small hit type). The difference is that the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, the game balls P are held by the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E. The number of support balls varies, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the storage state of the game medium, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine described in means 2,
The variable control means performs the second control at a higher ratio when the number of game media stored in the storage means in the first control is smaller than when the number of game media stored in the storage means is larger. (For example, when the CPU 103 has a small number of support balls when performing the first control (one support ball) and is a small hit of 8 or 12, the number of support balls is large when performing the first control ( (3 or 5 support balls) Smaller hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and smaller hits 7 and 11 (a part that performs the second control at a higher rate (100% probability), etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the second control will be performed, even if the number of game media passing through the predetermined region in the first control is small.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Specific effects that can be executed in a plurality of different modes based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball P) has passed through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening 283). An execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) is provided,
The specific effect execution means specifies in a different mode when the game medium entered by the first control passes through the specific area and when the game medium entered by the second control passes through the specific area. Performing an effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 causes a V winning by opening the second special winning opening 702B in the first control, executes the V winning jackpot effect A and executes the second control. When the V winning occurs when the second big winning opening 702B is opened, the V winning jackpot effect B is executed (see FIGS. 64D and 64A ').
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
A promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that prompts the entry of the game medium into the variable means in correspondence with the first control and the second control (for example, the effect control CPU 120, during a small hit game, An operation (operation) of causing the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 702B in response to opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the first control and opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control A portion for executing a winning promotion effect for promoting the.
When the game medium entered by the first control in the second pattern passes through the specific area, the promotion effect executing unit limits execution of the promotion effect corresponding to the second control in the second pattern ( For example, when the production control CPU 120 generates a winning promotion production image corresponding to the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B in the production pattern C when the V winning occurs in the first control, the production pattern For example, a portion displayed in a promotion mode B which is less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the winning promotion effect image performed corresponding to the first opening control of the second special winning opening 702B in C. (see FIGS. 59 (B) and (C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the promotion effect is performed although the advantageous value is determined to be given.

  Incidentally, the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. You may have it.

It is a front view showing a gaming machine in the embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic front view showing a second special variable winning ball device. It is a perspective view showing a state where the game board is seen from diagonally front. It is a perspective view showing a state where the game board is seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a state where the second special winning opening door is in the closed position, and (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the second special winning opening when the second special winning opening door is in the open position. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the first storage mechanism in a state where the first storage plate is in the storage position and (B) in a state where the first storage plate is in the release position. (A) is a first rotation state of the distribution member, (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the second storage mechanism in the second rotation state of the distribution member, (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of (A). Is. (A) is a state in which one game ball is stored in the second storage unit, (B) is a state in which the following game ball is guided to the discharge path, (C) is the game balls stored The state held by the member, (D) is a schematic view showing the second storage portion in a state in which the game ball is discharged toward the rotating body by the distribution member. (A) is a state in which two game balls are stored in the second storage portion, (B) is a state in which the following game balls are guided to the discharge path, and (C) is the stored first game ball. The state held by the sorting member, (D) the state in which the leading game ball is discharged toward the rotating body by the sorting member, (E) the state in which the subsequent game balls stored are held by the sorting member, (F) is a schematic diagram showing a second storage part in a state in which a subsequent game ball is discharged toward a rotating body by a distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the lower part of the second special variable winning ball device. (A) is a state in which the open / close plate is in an open position, (B) is a state in which the open / close plate is in a closed position, and (C) and (D) are plan sectional views showing a rotating body. It is a BB sectional view in Drawing 12 (C). 12A is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 12C, and FIG. 12B is a sectional view taken along line C′-C ′ of FIG. 12D. FIG. 7A is a front view showing the movable passage body and the origin position of the movable body, and FIG. (A) is a horizontal sectional view of the movable passage body, (B) is a schematic front sectional view showing a state of a game ball flowing down in the first movable portion, (C) is a state of a game ball flowing down in the first movable portion. It is an outline side sectional view showing. (A) is a schematic view showing an origin position of the production movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing an advanced position of the production movable body. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the effect movable body is seen obliquely from the front. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the effect movable body is seen from diagonally behind. It is a schematic front view showing a state in which the production movable body is located at the production body origin position. It is a schematic front view showing a state in which the production movable body is located between the production body origin position and the production body advancing position. It is a schematic front view showing a state in which the production movable body has moved to the production body advancing position. It is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the production movable body is in the first decoration state at the production body advancing position. It is a schematic front view showing a state where the effect movable body has changed from the first decorative state to the second decorative state at the effect body advancing position. It is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the effect movable body has changed from the first decorative state to the second decorative state at the effect body advancing position. It is the DD sectional view of FIG. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is an explanatory view illustrating a random number value counted on the main board side. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern of a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the number of pending storage of a special figure, (C) is a figure which shows the termination condition of a high base state. (A) is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table A, (B) is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table B, and (C) is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table C. (A) is a diagram showing a variation pattern of a normal symbol determined in the low base state, (B) is a diagram showing a variation pattern of a normal symbol determined in the high base state A, B, (C) is a universal symbol It is a figure which shows the opening content of the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth based on FIG. 6, (D) is a figure which shows the structural example of a public figure display result determination table, and (E) is a figure which shows various determination contents in a general figure game. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing for game control. It is the flowchart which shows the special design process treatment. (A) is a diagram showing a control pattern of the second special variable winning ball device, (B) is a content of the first control and the second control, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of control of the first pattern, (D) 8] is an explanatory diagram showing a control flow of a second pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the small hit opening pretreatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit end processing. (A)-(E) is explanatory drawing which shows the opening state of the first time in the small hit game state of small hit 2, 4, 6, 10. (A)-(E) is explanatory drawing which shows the opening state of the 2nd time in the small hitting game state of small hitting 2, 4, 6, 10. (A) to (D) show an example 1 in which the game ball is held in the lost ball holding section, and (E) to (H) show an example 2 in which the game ball is held in the lost ball holding section. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the situation where the storage of the game sphere of a 1st storage part is cancelled | released after a movable passage body moves. (A) ~ (D) is an explanatory view showing the flow of V winning, (E) ~ (G) is an explanatory view showing the flow of loss, (H) is the game ball held in the lost ball holding portion is discharged. It is explanatory drawing which shows the situation. (A)-(C) is explanatory drawing which shows a V winning rate. (A) if the game ball is not held in the missing ball holding part, (B) if one game ball is held in the missing ball holding part, (C) holds three game balls in the missing ball holding part In the case of being played, (D) is a table showing the V winning rate when five game balls are held in the lost ball holding portion. (A) is a plan view of a rotating body showing a state in which a game ball passes through an outlet, (B) is a sectional view taken along line HH of (A), and (C) shows a state in which a game ball is dropped from the outlet. Sectional view of the rotating body, (D) is a plan view of the rotating body showing a state in which ball biting has occurred at the discharge port, (E) is a sectional view taken along line JJ of (D), and (F) is a ball biting elimination operation. It is sectional drawing of a rotating body which shows the state which is performing. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a 2nd guidance path and a rotating body. (A) is a state in which an aspherical object is stored in the first storage section, (B) is a state in which storage in the first storage section is released but the non-spherical object does not flow down, (C) is a first state It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the storage of the storage part was cancelled | released and the non-spherical object flowed down. It is a timing chart showing a flow of a period in which the second big winning opening is opened in the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8 and 12. It is a timing chart showing a flow of a period in which the second big winning opening is opened in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the period when the 2nd big winning opening is opened in the small hits 7 and 11. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which V winning occurs after the first storage mechanism is released in the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which V winning does not occur after the first storage mechanism is released in the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V prize is generated after the first opening in the small hits 8 and 12. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V winning does not occur after the first opening in the small hits 8 and 12. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V winning occurs after the second opening in the small hits 8 and 12. 12 is a timing chart showing a flow in which an error occurs due to a mismatch of incoming and outgoing balls in the small hits 7 and 11. (A) is a table showing types of winning promotion effects, (B) is a view showing a promotion mode A, and (C) is a view showing a promotion mode B. (A) is a timing chart showing an operation example of an effect pattern A, (B) is an effect pattern B (with V winning), and (C) is an operation example of an effect pattern B (without V winning). (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an operation example of the effect pattern C. (A) ~ (G) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect during the small hit game (in the case of winning promotion effect pattern A). (A) ~ (G) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect (in the case of winning promotion effect patterns B, C) during the small hit game. (A) ~ (D), (A ') ~ (D') is an explanatory view showing the flow of each effect (in the case of winning promotion effect pattern C) during the small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit symbol, (B) is a small hit symbol type determination table used by the CPU for effect control. (A) is a figure which shows the display content output at the time of button operation detection or an operation effective period ending, (B) is a figure which shows a button operation effect pattern determination table, (C) is a figure which shows a time gauge display mode. . (A)-(F) is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation production of button operation production. (A) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the display mode of the time gauge in the effect pattern PT-1, (B) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the display mode of the time gauge in the effect pattern PT-2, PT-4, (C) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the display mode of the time gauge in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6. (A) is a figure which shows the push button mode change pattern in this modification 2, (B) is a figure which shows a normal button, (C) is a figure which shows a large button, (D) is a figure which shows a rainbow button. (A) is an explanatory view showing a first special figure display result determination table in the second modification, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special figure display result determination table in the second modification.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front side, front side) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear side (back side). In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, a portion described as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly classified into a gaming board 2 (gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 (an underframe) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. ) And is composed of. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area Y surrounded by the guide rails 2b is formed. In the game area Y, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launch device and is driven into the game area Y. A glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the glass door frame 50 can open and close the game area Y. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

  At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (below the game area Y in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device for performing variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  A prize winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the left side of the image display device 5.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a fixed open state where a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole (not shown) that changes between a difficult-to-enter state and an enterable state by the first solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B has, for example, a variable plate (not shown) that is movable in the front-rear direction, and when the first solenoid 81 is in the off state, the variable plate is in the retracted position, so The game ball is retracted from the game area Y side, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (it is difficult to enter the second starting winning opening). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the first solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable plate is in the advance position to advance to the game area Y side, so that the game ball can enter the second starting prize hole. (Easy entry) enters the enterable state (also referred to as the second start winning opening enters the enterable state). When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be a device that changes between a difficult-to-enter state and an enterable state, and may be, for example, an electric tulip type accessory. The detailed structure of the variable winning ball device 6B will be described later.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (three places on the lower left side of the game area Y in the example shown in FIG. 1), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A first special variable winning ball device 7A having a first big winning opening 701B is provided below the winning ball device 6A. The first special variable winning ball device 7A includes a first special winning opening door 701A that is opened and closed by a second solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and is in an enterable state (open state) by the first special winning opening door 701A. And a first special winning opening 701B that changes into a difficult state to enter (closed state).

  As an example, in the first special variable winning a prize sphere device 7A, the first special winning opening door 701A is the first when the second solenoid 82 for the first special winning opening door 701A (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state. The game ball cannot enter (pass) the first special winning opening 701B by making the special winning opening 701B difficult to enter (closed state). On the other hand, in the first special variable winning a prize ball device 7A, when the first solenoid 82 for the first special winning opening door 701A is in the ON state, the first special winning opening door 701A enters the first special winning opening 701B. As a possible state (open state), the game ball easily enters the first special winning opening 701B.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first big winning opening 701B is detected by, for example, the first count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first special winning opening 701B that is in the enterable state (open state) in the first special variable winning a prize ball device 7A, another winning opening such as a starting winning opening is opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special winning opening 701B is in the enterable state (open state) in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, the game ball can enter the first special winning opening 701B, which is advantageous for the player. .. On the other hand, if the first special winning opening 701B becomes difficult to enter in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, it is impossible to pass (enter) the game ball into the first special winning opening 701B to obtain the winning ball. It becomes possible or difficult and is disadvantageous to the player.

  A second special variable winning ball device 7B is provided from the center to the right side of the game area Y on the game board 2. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is formed in a frame shape so that the player can visually recognize the image display device 5. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a second special winning opening door 702A which is opened and closed by the third solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening 702B at the upper end thereof. 702A forms a second special winning opening 702B that changes between an enterable state (open state) and an inaccessible state (closed state).

  As an example, in the second special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, when the third solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door 702A is in the off state, the second special winning opening door 702A closes the second special winning opening 702B. As a result, the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second special winning opening 702B. On the other hand, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the second special winning opening door 702A opens the second special winning opening 702B when the third solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door 702A is on. As a state, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second special winning opening 702B.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening 702B is detected by, for example, the second count switch 24A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second special winning opening 702B that is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, another winning opening such as a starting winning opening is opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the second special winning opening 702B is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening 702B, which is advantageous for the player. .. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 702B is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it is impossible to pass (enter) the game ball into the second special winning opening 702B to obtain the winning ball. Or it will be difficult and disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, a third count switch 24B, a fourth count switch 24C and a fifth count switch 24D are provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B. In the present embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 7B changes from the difficult-to-enter state to the enterable state by being controlled to the small-hit game state based on the occurrence of a small hit described later, When the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 702B in the winning gaming state enters the V winning opening 283 (see FIG. 13) described later and is detected by the third count switch 24B, the V winning is generated, It is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also called a starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (below the game area Y in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  Above the variable winning ball device 6B, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a general-picture holding indicator for storing the number of general-picture holding memories, which is the number of general-purpose figure games, is not provided. May be memorizable.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area Y, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a movable passage body 400 and a production movable body 500 described later are provided.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area Y. Has been. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device ( A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) for storing is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that is held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Second special variable winning ball device 7B)
Next, the details of the second special variable winning ball device 7B will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 14. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view showing the second special variable winning ball device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 6 is a sectional view showing the second special winning opening in the state where the second special winning opening door is in the closed position and (B) in the state where the second special winning opening door is in the open position. 7A is a cross-sectional view showing the first storage mechanism in a state where the first storage plate is at the storage position and FIG. 7B is a state where the first storage plate is at the release position. FIG. 8A is a sectional view showing the second storage mechanism in the first rotating state of the distributing member, FIG. 8B is a sectional view showing the second storing mechanism in the second rotating state of the distributing member, and FIG. FIG. 9, (A) is a state in which one game ball is stored in the second storage portion, (B) is a state in which the following game ball is guided to the discharge path, (C) is a stored game FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a second storage part in a state in which a ball is held by a distribution member, and (D) is a state in which a game ball is discharged toward a rotating body by the distribution member. 10, (A) is a state in which two game balls are stored in the second storage portion, (B) is a state in which the following game balls are guided to the discharge path, (C) is the stored head The state in which the game ball is held by the distribution member, (D) is the state in which the leading game ball is discharged toward the rotating body by the distribution member, and (E) is the subsequent game ball stored in the distribution member. A state of being held, (F) is a schematic view showing a second storage part in a state in which the following game balls are discharged toward the rotating body by the distribution member. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the lower portion of the second special variable winning ball device. 12A is a state in which the open / close plate is in the open position, FIG. 12B is a state in which the open / close plate is in the closed position, and FIGS. 12C and 12D are plan sectional views showing the rotating body. FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 14A is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 12C, and FIG. 14B is a sectional view taken along the line C′-C ′ of FIG. 12D. In the following, the game ball may be referred to as the game ball P or the game balls P1, P2 ,.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the second special variable winning ball device 7B enters from the second special winning opening 702B provided in the upper part of the game area Y above the image display device 5 as described above. The first guide route 201 for guiding the game ball downward, and the second guide route 202A for guiding the game ball guided by the first guide route 201 so that the game ball can enter a V winning opening 283 (see FIG. 12) described later. , 202B, a third guidance route 203A, 203B that guides the game ball guided by the first guidance route 201 into a V winning opening 283 described later, and a second guidance route 202A that are allowed to enter. The first storage mechanism 204 capable of storing the game ball, the second storage mechanism 205 capable of storing the game ball guided by the third guide path 203A, and the game ball guided by the second guide path 202A, 202B. V prize V winning ball holding portion 272 (see FIGS. 12C and 12D) that holds the ball 283 so that it can enter, and the game balls guided by the second guidance routes 202A and 202B or the third guidance routes 203A and 203B. A rotating body 208 having loss ball holding portions 273A to 273E (see FIGS. 12C and 12D) that holds the rotating body 208 so that it cannot enter the 283, and a support that rotatably supports the rotating body 208 below the image display device 5. Mainly has a member 209 and a discharge path 210 for discharging a part of the game ball guided to the third guide path 203A to the back side of the game board 2 and then discharging it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

  The first guide path 201, the second guide paths 202A and 202B, the third guide paths 203A and 203B, the first storage mechanism 204, and the second storage mechanism 205 are all tubular with a passage forming member made of a synthetic resin material. The game ball that has entered from the second special winning opening 702B is designed to flow down naturally. Further, at least the front surface side of the first guide path 201, the second guide paths 202A, 202B, and the third guide paths 203A, 203B is formed of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property, and a game ball flowing down inside is played. It is possible to see through.

  In addition, the third guiding paths 203A and 203B are positions (the display area of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the like) that are overlapped with the left front side of the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2. It is arranged in a position where it does not overlap with the reserved storage display area) so that the player can visually recognize the display area of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the second big winning opening 702B is a horizontally long rectangular winning opening provided in front of the game board surface of the game board 2 so as to open upward. The second special winning opening door 702A is connected to the plunger 83A of the third solenoid 83 via a link member 220, and is a closed position that closes the second special winning opening 702B when the third solenoid 83 is in the off state. (See FIG. 6 (A)), and an open position (see FIG. 6 (B)) that retracts to the game board 2 side to open the second special winning opening 702B when the third solenoid 83 is in the ON state. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-back direction between.

  Further, the second special winning opening door 702A is provided so as to incline downward from the right end to the left end as shown in FIG. 3, and is provided on the right side of the second special winning opening door 702A in the closed position. It is provided to guide the game ball guided by the wall portion H to the left. In the present embodiment, among the game balls that have been launched from the launching device (not shown) and have entered the upper part of the game area Y, the game balls that have collided with the wall portion H are guided toward the second big winning opening 702B. .. When the second special winning opening 702B is in a difficult-to-enter state (closed state), it flows down on the second special winning opening door 702A and is guided to the left side of the second special winning opening 702B, and the second big winning opening 702B. Is in an enterable state (open state), it becomes possible to enter the second special winning opening 702B.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the second special winning opening door 702A is in the closed position that makes the second special winning opening 702B difficult to enter, the upper surface of the second special winning opening door 702A is provided with a plurality of game balls. Has a length that allows it to flow down toward the left side, so a plurality of game balls may be awarded all at once when the state changes to an enterable state.

  In this embodiment, when the second special winning opening 702B is in a difficult state to enter, a plurality of game balls flow down to the left on the upper surface of the second special winning opening door 702A. The invention is not limited to this, and delay means for increasing the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second special winning opening door 702A (for example, the second special winning opening 702B). By providing a plurality of contact portions alternately provided in the upper and lower walls toward the flow direction of the game ball), the game ball meanders back and forth to flow toward the left side to slow down the flow speed. By doing so, since a large number of game balls are likely to stay when passing over the upper surface of the second special winning opening door 702A, it is possible to win a large number of game balls when the state changes to the enterable state. Becomes

(First storage mechanism 204)
As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is detected by the second count switch 24A while flowing down the first guide route 201, and then the second guide route 202A and the third guide route 202A. It reaches the branching part 221 with the guide route 203A. A first storage mechanism 204 is provided at a position in the vicinity of the branch portion 221 in the second guide path 202A, and only one game ball that has entered the second guide path 202A can be stored.

  The first storage mechanism 204 regulates the downward flow of the game ball P1 (first game ball) that has entered the second guide path 202A and can store the first storage plate 222 and the first storage plate 222. And a fourth solenoid 84 for driving the. The 1st storage plate 222 is connected with the plunger 84A of the 4th solenoid 84 via the link member 223, and when the 4th solenoid 84 is an OFF state, it protrudes to the 2nd guidance path 202A, and the downflow of the game ball is carried out. A storage position (see FIG. 7 (A)) that regulates and stores in the second guide path 202A, and retreats above the second guide path 202A when the fourth solenoid 84 is in the on-state to flow down the game ball. Is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between a release position (see FIG. 7 (B)) for allowing the storage and releasing the storage.

  The game ball P1 flowing down the first guidance route 201 is guided to the second guidance route 202A side at the branching portion 221 in preference to the third guidance route 203A. When the first storage plate 222 is located at the storage position, the flow down of the game ball P1 that has entered the second guidance route 202A is restricted by the first storage plate 222, and in the vicinity of the branch portion 221 in the second guidance route 202A. Only one is stored in a certain first storage unit 227 (see FIG. 7A). Further, when the first storage plate 222 is located at the release position, the game ball P1 that has entered the second guide path 202A is allowed to flow down, and reaches the discharge port 224 provided almost directly above the rotating body 208.

  The bottom surface of the second guide path 202A is provided continuously with the first bottom surface 212A that guides the game ball that has entered the branch portion 221 from the first guide path 201 to the second guide path 202A and the downstream side of the first bottom surface 212A. It comprises a second bottom surface 212B, a third bottom surface 212C continuously provided on the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B, and a fourth bottom surface 212D continuously provided on the downstream side of the third bottom surface 212C.

  212 A of 1st bottom surfaces are arrange | positioned so that an upstream side edge part (upper part of inclination) may be located in the 1st guidance route 201 a little to the left of the substantially center position of the left-right direction, and flow down the 1st guidance route 201. The game ball to be played is guided to the second guidance route 202A side in preference to the third guidance route 203A. The second bottom surface 212B is arranged at a position corresponding to the first storage part 227.

  The first bottom surface 212A, the second bottom surface 212B, the third bottom surface 212C and the fourth bottom surface 212D are all inclined surfaces that gradually incline downward toward the downstream side so that the game balls can flow down naturally, The descending inclination angles of the first bottom surface 212A, the second bottom surface 212B, the third bottom surface 212C, and the fourth bottom surface 212D with respect to the horizontal plane are larger in the order of the first bottom surface 212A, the third bottom surface 212C, the fourth bottom surface 212D, and the second bottom surface 212B. That is, the downward inclination angle θ2 of the second bottom surface 212B corresponding to the first storage portion 227 is the downward inclination angle of the other bottom surface (first bottom surface 212A, third bottom surface 212C, fourth bottom surface 212D) in the second guide path 202A. It is smaller than θ1, θ3, θ4 (θ2 <θ1, θ3, θ4). Further, the downward inclination angle θ3 of the third bottom surface 212C, which is continuously provided on the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B, is larger than the downward inclination angle θ4 of the fourth bottom surface 212D on the downstream side (θ3> θ4).

  Therefore, the game balls that have entered the branch portion 221 in a state where the game balls are not stored in the first storage portion 227 are guided by the first bottom surface 212A toward the second guide path 202A, and then by the first storage plate 222. The flow down is regulated and stored in the first storage unit 227. The game ball whose flow down is restricted is located on the second bottom surface 212B. When the regulation of storage is released, the game ball guided to the third bottom surface 212C by the second bottom surface 212B is accelerated by the third bottom surface 212C, and then the flow-down speed is slightly reduced at the fourth bottom surface 212D.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7A, when the game ball P1 is stored in the first storage part 227 in the second guide route 202A, the entrance of the second guide route 202A is blocked by the game ball P1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7 (A), the subsequent game balls P2, P3, P4, ... Which reach the branch portion 221 are the second guide path 202A by the game balls P1 stored by the first storage plate 222. Entry into the third induction pathway 203A is inhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the second guide path 202A is a fixed path, whereas the second guide path 202B is a movable path and is formed at the downstream end of the second guide path 202A. When the discharge port 224 and the inflow port 225 formed at the upstream end of the second guide path 202B coincide with each other, the second guide path 202A and the second guide path 202B communicate with each other to form one guide path. It is like this.

  Although details will be described later, an inflow port 225 is formed in the upper part of the second guide route 202B, and a discharge port 226 is formed in the lower part of the second guide route 202B. Then, when the second guide route 202B moves to the passage forming position, the discharge port 224 formed at the downstream end of the second guide route 202A and the inlet 225 formed at the upper part of the second guide route 202B coincide with each other. In addition, the discharge port 226 on the lower surface of the second guide path 202B is located at a position slightly rearward of the rotating shaft 90A (see FIG. 11) above the rotating body 208. Therefore, the game ball P1 stored by the first storage plate 222 flows down the second guide path 202A by the release of the storage by the first storage plate 222, and then passes through the outlet 224 and the inlet 225. To the second guide path 202B, and after flowing down the second guide path 202B, it is discharged from the discharge port 226 and drops onto the rotating body 208.

(Second storage mechanism 205)
As shown in FIG. 3, the game ball flowing down the third guiding path 203A drops downward after being guided to the left side from the branching portion 221 and then through the second storage mechanism 205 and the third guiding path 203B. And is guided to the right side (rotating body 208 side). A second storage mechanism 205 is provided at a position between the third guidance route 203A and the third guidance route 203B so that one or two gaming balls flowing down the third guidance route 203A can be stored. Is becoming

  As shown in FIG. 8, the second storage mechanism 205 stores a game ball (eg, game balls P2, P3) flowing down the third guiding path 203A in a first rotating state and the game ball on the rotating body 208. It has a distribution member 242 that can be changed to a second rotation state in which the distribution member 242 can flow downward, and a fifth solenoid 85 that drives the distribution member 242. Specifically, the distribution member 242 includes a main body portion 242A having a concave holding portion 242a capable of holding a game ball, and a connecting portion 242B protruding outward from the main body portion 242A, and the main body portion 242A is , The third guide path 203A is rotatably attached to a member that constitutes the third guiding path 203A by a vertically extending rotation shaft 243, and the connecting portion 242B is connected to the plunger 85A of the fifth solenoid 85.

  The distribution member 242 is in a first rotation state in which the holding portion 242a faces the second storage portion 247 side (upstream (left side) side of the third guiding path 203A) when the fifth solenoid 85 is in the off state (Fig. 8 (A)) and the state where the holding portion 242a is arranged above the inflow port 203C to the rotating body 208 when the fifth solenoid 85 is in the ON state, that is, the holding portion 242a is in the second storage portion 247. It is provided so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction about the rotation shaft 243 between the second rotation state (see FIG. 8B) facing the direction away from.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (C), the second storage part 247 formed at the position on the left side of the distribution member 242 (the position on the upstream side) has the route bottom surface of the third guide route 203A via the step part 247a. It is formed at a lower position and extends below the distribution member 242. Further, the third guiding path 203B extends from below the second storage portion 247 toward the rotating body 208, and the bottom wall portion forming the second storage portion 247 flows into the second storage portion 247. An inflow port 203C is formed at a position slightly deviated from the orbit of the game ball to the front side.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8 (A), when the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state, the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is displaced to the rear side of the inflow port 203C. The game ball P2 is regulated from flowing down to the third guiding path 203B via the inflow port 203C, and is stored in the second storage section 247. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the distribution member 242 is in the second rotation state, the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C, so that the inflow port 203C is set. It flows down to the 3rd guidance path 203B via, is guided by the 3rd guidance path 203B, and flows down toward the rotary body 208. A fifth count switch 24D (proximity sensor) is disposed below the bottom surface of the third guiding path 203B, and is a gaming ball flowing down the third guiding path 203B, that is, a gaming ball guided by the rotating body 208. Can be detected.

  In addition, a discharge path 210 for discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed at a position on the left side of the second storage part 247 (a position on the upstream side), and is stored in the second storage part 247. The game ball that is not played is discharged from the third guide path 203A to the discharge path 210 through the discharge port 210a.

  Next, a mode in which one game ball is stored in the second storage section 247 will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the distribution member 242 is in the second rotation state, one game ball can be stored in the second storage part 247.

  According to this, the game ball P2 guided to the third guiding path 203A and flowing into the second storing section 247 is brought into contact with the tip end portion of the holding section 242a of the distributing member 242, and thus to the third guiding path 203B side. Since it is prevented from entering and being held by the holding portion 242a, it is stored in the second storage portion 247. In the second rotation state of the distribution member 242, the left-right dimension L1 between the tip portion of the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242 and the step portion 247a forming the second storage portion 247 is the game ball. The size is such that only one can be stored.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the following game ball P3 flows in from the third guiding path 203A in a state where the game ball P2 is stored in the second storage section 247, the game ball P3 is shaken. Since the game ball P2 stored in the second storage portion 247 by the dividing member 242 prevents the game ball P2 from entering the third guide path 203B, the game ball P2 is guided toward the discharge path 210. The game ball P2 here is a game ball that has entered the second guiding path 202A next to the first game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227, and the game ball P3 is the game ball P2. Next is a game ball that has entered the second guidance route 202A. Furthermore, in the state where the game ball P2 is stored in the second storage section 247, the game balls after the game ball P3 ... Are similarly guided toward the discharge path 210.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, changing the second rotation state of the distribution member 242 (the state where one game ball P2 is stored in the second storage portion 247) to the first rotation state. As a result, the game ball P2 enters the holding portion 242a by gravity and is held. Then, as shown in FIG. 9D, the distribution member 242 is changed to the second rotation state again, so that the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is disposed on the inflow port 203C. It flows down to the 3rd guidance route 203B via 203C.

  Next, a mode in which two game balls are stored in the second storage section 247 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10 (A), when the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state, two game balls can be stored in the second storage section 247.

  According to this, the game ball P2 guided to the third guiding path 203A and flowing into the second storage part 247 is held by the holding part 242a of the distribution member 242, so that it is stored in the second storage part 247. become. The lateral dimension L2 between the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242 and the stepped portion 247a forming the second storage portion 247 is set to a size capable of storing two game balls. Therefore, in the second rotation state of the distribution member 242, when the following game ball P3 flows in from the third guiding path 203A in the state where the game ball P2 is stored in the second storage section 247, The ball P3 is also stored in the second storage section 247.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the following game ball P4 flows in from the third guiding path 203A in the state where the game balls P2 and P3 are stored in the second storage section 247, the game ball P4 is Since the game balls P2 and P3 stored in the second storage portion 247 by the distribution member 242 prevent the game ball P2 and P3 from entering the third guide path 203B, they are guided toward the discharge path 210. In the state where the game balls P2 and P3 are stored in the second storage section 247, the game balls after the game ball P4 and the like are similarly guided toward the discharge path 210.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, from the first rotation state of the distribution member 242 (the state where two game balls P2 are stored in the second storage portion 247) to the second rotation state. By changing, the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C and flows down to the third guide path 203B via the inflow port 203C. At this time, since the movement of the game ball P3 is restricted by the distribution member 242, the state stored in the second storage section 247 is maintained.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 (E) and (F), the distribution member 242 is brought into the first rotation state again, the game ball P3 is made to enter the holding portion 242a, and the game ball P3 is held in the holding portion 242a. The game ball P3 is disposed on the inflow port 203C and flows down to the third guide path 203B via the inflow port 203C by setting the second rotation state again.

  In this way, the second storage mechanism 205 has the distribution member 242 capable of changing between the first rotation state and the second rotation state, and the game balls P stored by the mode of the distribution member 242. Since the number changes, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stored state of the game ball P by paying attention to the mode of the distribution member 242.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game ball guided to the third guiding path 203A flows down to the left above the image display device 5, and then drops downward at the upper left side of the image display device 5. .. Then, after being guided to the back side at the upper left side of the image display device 5, it falls along the left side of the image display device 5 and to the left side part of the rotating body 208 at the lower left side of the image display device 5. Be guided towards. That is, the third guide paths 203A and 203B on the left side are provided so as to bypass the side so as not to cross the display area of the image display device 5.

  In this way, the third guiding path 203A is formed so as to detour laterally so as not to cross the display area of the image display device 5 and meander back and forth, so that the second storage from the second special winning opening 702B is performed. Since it takes a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) to reach the portion 247, it is possible to focus on the game ball flowing down the third guide route 203A, and the interest is improved.

  Moreover, since the game balls are stored or released by the second storage mechanism 205 at a position closer to the rotating body 208 than the second special winning opening 702B, the game balls enter the second special winning opening 702B. Since it takes time to reach from the second storage unit 247 to the second storage unit 247, it becomes difficult to know whether or not two game balls are stored in the second storage mechanism 205 as will be described later, so that the expectation is maintained. You can

  Further, in the present embodiment, after flowing down the first guidance route 201, the game balls that are guided to the second guidance route 202A side by the branching unit 221 and stored in the first storage unit 227 are released. As a result, since it is a game ball that can enter the V winning opening 283 or the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E when it reaches the rotating body 208 by flowing down the second guiding path 202B, the following description will be given. ". On the other hand, the game balls that are guided to the third guiding route 203A side by the branching unit 221 and stored in the second storing unit 247 flow down the third guiding route 203B due to the release of the storage, and then to the rotating body 208. When it arrives, it does not enter the V winning opening 283, but by entering the lost ball holding parts 273A to 273E, it prevents the "game ball" from entering the lost ball holding parts 273A to 273E. It may be called a "support ball" because it supports the entry into the winning opening 283.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the support member 209 has a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view, and is obliquely provided at a lower position of the image display device 5 such that the upper surface thereof gradually inclines downward toward the front side. ing. A rotary hole 260 into which the rotary body 208 is rotatably inserted is formed so as to penetrate substantially at the center in the left-right direction. The third guide path 203B is arranged on the left side of the rotation hole 260 in the support member 209, and the game balls are supplied from the outer side of the rotating body 208.

  At the position corresponding to the rotation hole 260 on the lower surface of the support member 209, a bottomed cylindrical support cylinder 265 that rotatably supports the rotating body 208 is fixed. The rotating body 208 is loosely fitted inside the support cylinder 265, and constitutes a path for discharging a game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a V winning ball guiding path 284, a lost ball guiding path 288, etc. described later). The rotary body motor 90 (see FIGS. 13 and 14) fixed to the lower portion of the discharge path unit 290 is fixed to the rotary shaft 90A, and is rotated by the rotary body motor 90 in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise in plan view in the present embodiment). It is rotated around). The rotary shaft 90A is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the support member 209 that is tilted forward.

  In the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265, a through hole 265a through which the rotation shaft 90A is inserted, a V winning opening 283 formed at a position corresponding to a V winning ball guiding path 284 described later, and a lost ball guiding path 288. And a discharge port 287 formed at a corresponding position.

  Further, between the support cylinder 265 and the discharge path unit 290, an opening / closing plate 289 that can open and close the discharge port 287 and a guide member 291 that guides the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 289 are arranged. The guide member 291 includes a tubular portion 291a through which the rotary shaft 90A is inserted, a through hole 291b formed at a position corresponding to the V winning opening 283, and a through hole 291c formed at a position corresponding to the discharge opening 287. , And a guide groove 291d for guiding the shaft portion 289b of the opening / closing plate 289, and is fixed to the discharge path unit 290.

  The opening / closing plate 289 includes a hole portion 289a that is fitted onto the tubular portion 291a so as to be rotatable around an axis, and a shaft portion 289b formed outside the hole portion 289a. It is inserted in the guide groove 291d. The discharge path unit 290 is assembled with a sixth solenoid 86 that drives the opening / closing plate 289, and the tip of the shaft portion 289b is connected to the plunger 86A of the sixth solenoid 86.

  The opening / closing plate 289 is arranged at the open position (see FIGS. 12A and 12C) that opens the discharge port 287 of the support cylinder 265 when the sixth solenoid 86 is in the off state, and the sixth solenoid 86 is on. In the state, it is arranged at the closed position (see FIGS. 12B and 12D) that closes the outlet 287 of the support cylinder 265.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the rotating body 208 includes a disc portion 270 having a circular shape in plan view, a plurality of standing wall portions 271 provided upright along the peripheral edge of the disc portion 270, and one of the plurality of standing walls. A V-winning ball holding portion 272 formed penetrating the portion 271 in the vertical direction, and a plurality (five in the present embodiment) of lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E formed between the standing wall portions 271 respectively. , Mainly. Note that in FIGS. 12C and 12D, for convenience of description in FIG. 46 described later, the lost sphere holding portions 273A to 273E are numbered 1 to 5, respectively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 208 has one V winning ball holding portion 272, but it may have a plurality of V winning ball holding portions. Further, although the rotating body 208 has a plurality (five in the present embodiment) of the lost sphere holding portions 273A to 273E, the number of the lost sphere holding portions may be less than five or six or more.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the V winning ball holding portion 272 is formed by a hole penetrating in the vertical direction and having a size capable of holding only one game ball, and the disc portion 270 side. Is open, and the outer peripheral surface side is closed by a standing wall portion 271. In other words, the game ball (game ball) on the disk part 270 can enter, but the game ball (support ball) from the outer side, that is, the third guide path 203B cannot enter.

  As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 14 (B), the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are formed by hole portions which are vertically penetrated and have a size capable of holding only one game ball, The disk portion 270 and the outer peripheral surface side are open. That is, both the game ball (game ball) on the disk part 270 and the game ball (support ball) entering from the third guide path 203B on the outer side, that is, on the side of the rotating body 208 are allowed to enter. There is.

  As shown in FIGS. 11, 13 and 14, below the V winning opening 283 of the support cylinder 265, the game ball held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 enters through the through hole 291b of the guide member 291. A possible V winning ball guiding path 284 is provided, and the gaming balls flowing down the V winning ball guiding path 284 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, in the vicinity of the V winning opening 283 in the V winning ball guiding path 284, a third count switch 24B for detecting a game ball that has entered the V winning opening 283 is provided, and the downstream side of the third count switch 24B. At the position of, the discharge path 210 extending from the second storage section 247 is joined (in particular, see FIG. 14).

  A notch for allowing the game ball from the third guiding path 203B to enter any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208 at a position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B in the upper portion of the peripheral wall of the support cylinder 265. The portion 286 is formed. Further, below the discharge port 287 of the support cylinder 265, a lost ball guiding path for discharging the game ball held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E from the rotating body 208 through the through hole 291c of the guide member 291. 288 is provided, and the game ball flowing down the lost ball guide path 288 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a fourth count switch 24C for detecting a game ball discharged from the discharge port 287 is provided at a position near the discharge port 287 in the lost ball guide path 288.

  As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 14, when the game ball that has entered and is held from the third guide path 203B passes over the discharge port 287 by the rotation of the rotating body 208, the discharge port 287 is opened and closed by the opening / closing plate 289. If it is closed, it contacts the open / close plate 289 and discharge is regulated to stay in the rotating body 208 (see FIG. 47 (B)). If the discharge port 287 is opened, it naturally flows down from the discharge port 287. It is designed to be discharged (see FIG. 47 (C)).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12C and 12D, the V winning opening 283 of the support cylinder 265 is closer to the inside of the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265 (closer to the rotating shaft 90A) than the discharge opening 287 of the support cylinder 265. Position). That is, since the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E shift in the outer diameter direction of the V winning opening 283 when passing through the V winning opening 283 due to the rotation of the rotating body 208, the opening area of the V winning opening 283 is larger than that of the game ball. It becomes smaller, and the game balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E do not enter the V winning opening 283.

  On the other hand, the game ball held in the V winning ball holding portion 272 is restricted from falling by the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion until the V winning ball holding portion 272 reaches the V winning opening 283. Therefore, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 passes through the V winning opening 283 by the rotation of the rotating body 208, the game ball held in the V winning ball holding portion 272 drops into the V winning opening 283. It will be. Further, the V winning ball holding portion 272 is displaced in the inner diameter direction of the discharge port 287 when passing over the discharge port 287 due to the rotation of the rotating body 208, so that the opening area of the discharge port 287 becomes smaller than the game ball. The game ball held in the V winning ball holding unit 272 does not enter the discharge port 287.

  Further, the rotating shaft 90A of the rotating body 208 is tilted forward, but the disc portion 270 is located at a position higher than the lower portion of the game ball held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. That is, since the step portion is formed between the disc portion 270 and the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265, the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are inclined higher than the rotation shaft 90A. When passing through, the game balls held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E hardly flow out to the disc portion 270 (see FIG. 14).

  Further, the standing wall portion 271 has a protrusion dimension L30 from the upper surface of the disk portion 270 that is longer than the radius R of the game ball P (L30> R), so the game ball P that has fallen onto the upper surface of the disk portion 270. Is less likely to deviate from the rotating body 208 (see FIG. 43).

(Movable unit)
Next, a movable unit including the movable passage body device and the effect device will be described with reference to FIGS. 15A is a front view showing the movable passage body and the origin position of the movable body, and FIG. 15B is a front view showing the advance position of the movable passage body and the movable body. 16, (A) is a horizontal sectional view of the movable passage body, (B) is a schematic front sectional view showing the state of the game ball flowing down in the first movable portion, (C) is a game flowing down in the first movable portion. It is a schematic side sectional view showing a state of a sphere. FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram showing the origin position of the production movable body, and FIG. 17B is the advance position of the production movable body. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the production movable body is seen from diagonally front. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the production movable body is viewed from diagonally behind.

  As shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. 5 and FIG. 15, the movable passage body device having the movable passage body 400 and the production movable body device having the production movable body 500 are square frame shapes fixed to the back surface of the game board 2. Is provided on the base member 450. The image display device 5 is provided on the back side of the base member 450 (see FIG. 1), and the image display device 5 can be viewed from the front side through the opening of the base member 450. That is, the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are arranged between the game board 2 and the image display device 5.

  The movable passage body 400 and the production movable body 500 are the passage body origin position and the production body origin position (see FIG. 15 (A)) retracted to the peripheral portion of the front surface of the image display device 5, and the passage body origin position and the production body origin. It is possible to move (operate) between the position and the passage body advancing position and the effect body advancing position (see FIG. 15B) that appear on the front surface of the image display device 5. Even when the movable passage body 400 is arranged at the passage body advancing position and the effect movable body 500 is arranged at the effect body advancing position, since the effect movable body 500 is located behind the movable passage object 400, the movable movable body 500 is in contact with the effect passage body 400. There is no such thing.

(Movable passage device)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the movable passage body 400 is attached so as to be linearly movable in the left-right direction and the first movable portion 401 so as to be developed and converged in the left-right direction. The second movable portion 402 and the drive mechanism 403 that drives the first movable portion 401 in the left-right direction are mainly configured. The above-mentioned second guide path 202B is formed in the first movable portion 401.

  A rail portion 401d is attached to the front surface of the upper end portion of the first movable portion 401, and the rail portion 401d is guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to an upper guide rail 435 fixed to the base member 450. .. Further, an extension portion extending downward is formed in the lower portion on the rear surface side of the first movable portion 401, and a rail portion (not shown) extending left and right is provided in the extension portion. (Not shown) is guided to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to a guide rail (not shown) fixed to the lower portion of the base member 450.

  A passage body origin position sensor 92 is provided on the right side of the base member 450, and a passage body advancing position sensor 93 is provided on the left side of the base member 450, so that the movable passage body 400 is located at the passage body origin position. When the movable passage body 400 is located at the passage body advance position, the passage body origin position sensor 92 detects the detection piece provided on the first movable portion 401. When the movable passage body 400 is located at the passage body advance position, the passage body advance position sensor 93 is provided. The detection piece is detected by.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable portion 401 of the movable passage body 400 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material into a substantially cylindrical shape that opens vertically and has a bulging portion 413 that bulges toward the back side. Is formed at the bottom. A rod-shaped member 412 extending in the up-down direction is provided at a position corresponding to the bulging portion 413 of the first movable portion 401, and a protrusion 412a protruding in a spiral shape is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rod-shaped member 412. Has been formed. That is, the second guide path 202B is formed inside the first movable portion 401, and the game ball that has entered the second guide path 202B from the inlet 225 that is the upper opening flows down while meandering in the left-right direction. After that, at the position of the bulging portion 413, it spirally flows down along the protruding portion 412a, is discharged from the discharge opening 226 which is the lower opening, and falls onto the rotating body 208. As a result, the game ball flowing down the second guiding path 202B can be paid attention to, and the interest is improved, and the fall speed to the rotating body 208 is suppressed to prevent damage to the rotating body 208.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the second movable portion 402 of the movable passage body 400 has decorative members 404L and 404R that are arranged so as to be movable left and right with respect to the first movable portion 401. The decorative members 404L and 404R are projected to the left and right sides with respect to the first movable portion 401 and the non-deployed position (see FIG. 15A) which is the origin position where the decoration members 404L and 404R converge. It can be operated at the deployed position (see FIG. 15B). The second movable portion 402 is located at the non-deployed position when the movable passage body 400 is at the passage body origin position, and is located at the deployed position by the link mechanism (not shown) when the movable passage body 400 is at the passage body advance position. It is like this. That is, since the movable passage body 400 can be moved between the non-deployed position and the deployed position by using the movement of the movable passage body 400, it can be moved by a drive source separate from the passage body motor 91 for moving the movable passage body 400. Since it is not necessary to operate it, the number of parts can be reduced.

  The decorative members 404L and 404R are decorative members for improving the decorative property of the first movable portion 401, and although not particularly shown, the front plate, the rear plate, and the side plate of the first movable portion 401 are omitted in plan view. When the game ball is formed in a U-shape and is in the non-deployed position, the game ball flowing down the second guide path 202B from the gap between the left and right decorative members 404L and 404R is in the first visible state, and when in the deployed position. , The left and right decorative members 404L and 404R are separated from each other, the gap is widened, and the game ball flowing down the second guide path 202B is set to the second visible state in which the visibility is higher than the first visible state.

(Direction movable device)
As shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the production movable body device includes a base portion 450A that constitutes an upper left corner of a square frame-shaped base member 450, and a production movable body 500 operably provided to the base portion 450A. , And an operation mechanism 501 for operating the production movable body 500. The production movable body 500 includes a production body origin position (see FIG. 17A) located on the front surface of the base portion 450A, and a production body advance position (see FIG. 17B) diagonally below the production body origin position. , Are provided so as to be rotatable.

  The production movable body 500 is rotatable around the first movable portion 511 and a rotation shaft 510 which is provided on the rear surface of the first movable portion 511 so as to project in the front-rear direction and is rotatable toward the rear surface side of the first movable portion 511. And a second movable portion 512 provided in the.

  The first movable portion 511 includes a base portion 511A formed in a substantially circular shape in a front view, and a decorative portion 511B formed of a protruding piece radially extending from the peripheral edge of the base portion 511A around the rotation shaft 510. To be done. On the back side of the decorative portion 511B that hangs downward in the decorative portion 511B, a production body LED 518A capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided on the front surface, and light can be emitted toward the left and right sides. An LED substrate 519 (see FIG. 26) is provided on the rear surface of which the effect body LEDs 518B are provided.

  Further, a connecting shaft 503 is provided so as to project forward at a predetermined position on the peripheral portion of the base portion 511A, and the connecting shaft 503 is inserted into a guide hole 504 formed in a lower left portion of the base portion 450A. There is. The guide hole 504 is formed in a substantially V shape in a front view by the first guide portion 504A and the second guide portion 504B, and movably guides the connecting shaft 503.

  The second movable portion 512 includes decorative portions 512L and 512R arranged on the left side and right side of the back surface of the first movable portion 511. The decorative portions 512L and 512R have a plurality of protruding pieces that extend radially around the rotating shaft 510, are formed in substantially the same shape as the decorative portion 511B of the first movable portion 511, and have a shape similar to that of the first movable portion 511. Each of them is rotatably supported around a rotation shaft 510 and is connected to each other via a link member 513. The link member 513 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 514 projecting below the rotation shaft 510 on the back surface of the first movable portion 511, and one end thereof is pivotally supported by the decoration portion 512L and the other. The end is pivotally supported by the decoration portion 512R. In addition, since the distance from the rotating shaft 510 is different between the first pivotal support portion of the link member 513 of the decoration portion 512L and the second pivotal support portion of the link member 513 of the decoration portion 512R, the decoration portions 512L and 512R. One of them rotates about the rotation shaft 510 in the first direction, so that the link member 513 rotates about the rotation shaft 514. Therefore, the other of the link member 513 is different from the first direction via the link member 513. It is adapted to rotate in the opposite second direction.

  Further, the decoration portion 512L and the decoration portion 512R are connected by the tension spring 515 between the rotation shaft 510 and the rotation shaft 514, so that the decoration portion 512L and the decoration portion 512R are close to each other. When the decoration portion 512R is rotated in the first direction while being maintained in the state (see FIG. 23), the other decoration portion 512L is rotated in the second direction against the biasing force of the tension spring 515, and the decoration portion 512R is rotated. The second decorative state (see FIG. 25) in which 512L and the decorative portion 512R are separated is changed. Further, the decoration portion 512R has a projecting piece 516 that projects to the left of the rotating shaft 510, and an interlocking shaft 517 is projectingly provided on the back surface of the projecting piece 516.

  The operating mechanism 501 includes a rotary body 521 fixed to a performance body motor 520 fixed to the back surface side of the base portion 450A and a drive shaft (not shown) of the performance body motor 520 protruding to the front surface side of the base portion 450A. A first arm member 523 that is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 522 that projects in the front-rear direction and that is provided on the front surface of the base portion 450A; and a rotation shaft 528 that projects from the front surface of the base portion 450A. A second arm member 524 rotatably supported on the first arm member 524, a first link member 526 rotatably supported on a rotary shaft 525 projecting from the first arm member 523, and a first link member. A second link member 527 pivotally supported at one end of 526. The rotation shaft 528 is arranged with a predetermined gap between it and the front surface of the base portion 450A, and the first arm member 523 can be inserted into the gap.

  The first arm member 523 is formed by the first arm portion 523A and the second arm portion 523B in a substantially inverted shape when viewed from the front, and the bent portion of the first arm portion 523A and the second arm portion 523B is the rotation axis. It is pivotally supported by 522. A torsion spring 529 is attached to the rotating shaft 522 so as to urge the first arm member 523 upward.

  A long hole 531 is formed in the first arm portion 523A, and a connecting shaft 530 protruding from the peripheral edge of the rotating body 521 is inserted into the long hole 531 so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction. One end of the second arm portion 523B is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 510 of the first movable portion 511. Further, guide shafts 534A and 534B for guiding the second link member 527 in the longitudinal direction are provided on the front surface of the bottom wall 533 of the second arm portion 523B, and the side of the bottom wall 533 is provided. Guide walls 535A and 535B for guiding and moving the second link member 527 in the longitudinal direction are provided upright on the edge toward the front. In this way, the second arm portion 523B is formed in a substantially U-shape in cross section by the bottom wall 533 and the guide walls 535A and 535B.

  The first link member 526 is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 525 that is provided so as to project between the first arm portion 523A and the second arm portion 523B of the first arm member 523. A connecting shaft 536 that pivotally supports the second link member 527 is provided at one end of the first link member 526 so as to project toward the rear surface side. At the other end, a first acting portion 537 is formed which can come into contact with the connecting shaft 530 which is inserted into the elongated hole 531 of the first arm portion 523A and protrudes forward.

  The second link member 527 is formed by bending a slide portion 538 arranged between the guide walls 535A and 535B on the front surface of the bottom wall 533 of the second arm portion 523B and the slide portion 538, and the second movable portion. And a second action portion 539 that can come into contact with the interlocking shaft 517 of 512. Two long holes 540A and 540B are formed in the slide portion 538, and the guide shafts 534A and 534B of the second arm portion 523B are inserted therein.

  In the second link member 527 thus configured, the slide portion 538 is disposed between the guide walls 535A and 535B on the front surface of the bottom wall 533 of the second arm portion 523B, and the slide portion 538 includes the guide shaft 534A and the guide shaft 534A. It is guided by 534B and the guide walls 535A and 535B so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction. That is, the second link member 527 is arranged so as to be movable coaxially with the second arm portion 523B. In this state, the second acting portion 539 projects outward from the second arm portion 523B. The front side of the slide portion 538 is covered with the cover member 541, and the front side of the first link member 526 is covered with the cover member 542.

  The second arm member 524 is formed in a substantially V shape in a front view, one end thereof is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 528 of the base portion 450A, and the other end thereof is a rotation shaft on the back surface of the first movable portion 511. A rotary shaft 543, which is provided directly above 510, is axially supported via a long hole.

(Operation example of production movable object device)
Next, an operation example of the production movable body device will be described based on FIGS. 20 to 26. FIG. 20 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the production movable body is located at the production body origin position. FIG. 21 is a schematic front view showing a state where the production movable body is located between the production body origin position and the production body advancing position. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the production movable body has moved to the production body advancing position. FIG. 23 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the effect movable body is in the first decoration state at the effect body advancing position. FIG. 24 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the production movable body has changed from the first decoration state to the second decoration state at the production body advancing position. FIG. 25 is a schematic rear view showing a state where the effect movable body has changed from the first decorative state to the second decorative state at the effect body advancing position. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 20 to 26, some members such as the base are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the state where the production movable body 500 is located at the production body origin position, the decorative portion 511B has the first posture in which the decorative portion 511B faces the right side, and the decorative portions 512L and 512R are attached to the decorative portion 511B. Are in a first decoration state in which they are close to each other. Further, since the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is located at the upper end on the right side of the rotating shaft at the end of the elongated hole 531 on the rotating shaft 522 side, the first arm member 523A of the first arm member 523 is left. It is held in a state of being lifted diagonally upward. Therefore, the production movable body 500 is held at the production body origin position. Further, since the first arm member 523 is biased upward by the torsion spring 529, the second arm member 524 is biased upward by the tension spring 550 whose one end is locked to the base portion 450A. The production movable body 500 is stably held at the production body origin position. The connecting shaft 503 of the first movable portion 511 is located at the upper right end of the first guide portion 504A.

  The second link member 527 has the other end of the tension spring 551, one end of which is locked to the rotary shaft 522 side of the second arm portion 523B, being locked to the end of the rotary shaft 522 side, It is held at the first slide position on the rotating shaft 522 side. At this time, the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526 is separated from the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521. Further, the second action portion 539 of the second link member 527 is separated from the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R.

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the rotary body 521 is rotated counterclockwise by the effect body motor 520, the connecting shaft 530 moves downward while moving downward, whereby the first arm member 523 rotates counterclockwise. Rotate. The production movable body 500 descends in accordance with the rotation of the first arm member 523 about the rotation shaft 522, and the connection shaft 503 is located on the left side of the rotation shaft 510, whereby the rotation shaft 510. Rotate clockwise around. That is, the production movable body 500 rotates clockwise around the rotary shaft 510 (performs the first operation) while descending from the production body origin position. The connecting shaft 503 escapes from the right end to the left end of the first guide portion 504A as the rotating shaft 510 approaches the guide hole 504. Also, the second link member 527 remains held in the first slide position.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, when the rotary shaft 521 further rotates counterclockwise and the rotary shaft 510 moves away from the guide hole 504, the connecting shaft 503 moves the second guide portion 504B to the right. Move downwards. Then, the movement of the connecting shaft 503 is restricted at the right end portion of the second guide portion 504B, the rotation of the first arm member 523 is restricted, and the effect movable body 500 stops at the effect body advancing position.

  In the state where the production movable body 500 is restricted from moving at the production body advancing position and stopped, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is close to the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526 on the right side of the elongated hole 531. (Or abut). Further, the second action portion 539 of the second link member 527 is in close proximity (or abutment) to the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R. Then, the production movable body 500 is in the first decoration state in which the decorative parts 511B and the protruding parts of the decorative parts 512L and 512R are in the second posture in which the protruding parts face downward and the decorative parts 512L and 512R are close to the decorative part 511B. There is.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the rotating body 521 further rotates counterclockwise, the connecting shaft 530 moves further to the right of the elongated hole 531. However, the right end portion of the elongated hole 531 is formed in an arc shape. Therefore, the first arm member 523 does not rotate. Then, the connecting shaft 530 abuts and presses the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526. As a result, the first link member 526 rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 525, so that the second link member 527 resists the biasing force of the tension spring 551 and moves relative to the second arm portion 523B. It moves toward the second slide position on the rotating shaft 510 side.

  When the second link member 527 moves from the first slide position to the second slide position, the second acting portion 539 presses the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R. As a result, the decoration portion 512R rotates clockwise in the front view about the rotation shaft 510, and the decoration portion 512L rotates counterclockwise in the front view about the rotation shaft 510, so that the decoration portion 512L, The protruding piece of 512R changes to the second decorative state in which it is separated from the decorative portion 511B.

  In this way, the production movable body 500 performs the first operation of descending while rotating from the production body origin position to the production body advancing position by the connection shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 being rotated by the production body motor 520. After that, by further rotating the rotating body 521, the connecting shaft 530 acts on the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526 to rotate the first link member 526, which causes the second link member 527 to move. A second operation in which the projecting pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R rotate in a direction away from the decorative portion 511B by slidingly moving with respect to the second arm portion 523B and causing the second action portion 539 to interlock with the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. It is possible to

  Further, the first link member 526 and the second link member 527 for transmitting the power of the rotating body 521 rotated by the effect body motor 520 to the decorative portions 512L and 512R of the second movable portion 512 are the effect movable body 500. The first link member 526 and the second link member 527 are movably guided by the first arm member 523 because the first link member 526 and the second link member 527 are provided on the back side of the rotatably supported first arm member 523 so as not to be seen by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the number of parts, and it is possible to simplify the structure and improve the appearance.

  Further, the effect movable body 500 is not only rotatable about the rotation shaft 522 by the first arm member 523, but also rotatable about the first arm member 523 via the rotation shaft 510. Further, since the connecting shaft 503 arranged at a position different from the rotating shaft 510 is guided by the guide hole 504, the rotating shaft 510 is rotated about the rotating shaft 510 according to the rotation of the first arm member 523. Move. Therefore, it is possible to operate a plurality of locations with one drive source, and the operation mode of the first operation is complicated, so that the interest is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the decorative portion 511B and the decorative portions 512L and 512R are formed of a lens member made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the LED substrate 519 is provided on the back side of the decorative portion 511B. ing. The effect body LED 518A provided on the front surface of the LED substrate 519 is a top-type LED provided so as to be capable of irradiating light in a direction perpendicular or substantially perpendicular to the front surface, that is, forward. On the other hand, the effect body LED 518B provided on the back surface of the LED board 519 is an angle-type LED that can emit light in a direction parallel or substantially parallel to the back surface of the LED board 519, and emits light toward the outside. Is provided so that it can be irradiated.

  The production control CPU 120 moves the production movable body 500 to the production body advancing position and changes to the second decoration state at the production body advancing position when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state as described later. It is possible to cause the effect body LEDs 518A and 518B to emit light at the timing of making them. The light from the effect body LED 518A is emitted forward through the lens member, and the light from the effect body LED 518B is emitted outward. Therefore, by causing the effect body LEDs 518A and 518B to emit light, the light from the effect body LED 518A causes the front surface of the decorative portion 511B to emit light, and the light from the effect body LED 518B causes the light to be positioned outside the decorative portion 511B. The decorative portions 512L and 512R are illuminated and emit light.

  As described above, since the light source of the first movable portion 511 can be used to emit light without providing a light source in the decorative portions 512L and 512R operable with respect to the first movable portion 511, the number of parts can be reduced. At the same time, since the wiring or the like from the first movable portion 511 to the second movable portion 512 is unnecessary, the structure can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect movable body 500 from the effect body origin position to the effect body advancing position when the V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, and from the first decoration state. Although the form which changes to 2 decoration state and light-emits by LED 518A for production bodies and 518B was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, CPU120 for production control was controlled by the small hitting game state, for example. At the time, or when the movable passage body 400 moves to the passage body advance position, the effect movable body 500 is moved to the effect body advance position, and when the V winning occurs, the first decoration state is changed to the second decoration state. Alternatively, the effect body LEDs 518A and 518B may be caused to emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 has predetermined effect timings other than the small hitting game state (for example, various notice effects that suggest occurrence of a small hit or a big hit, and a big hit during the big hit to notify that the round game will continue during the big hit). The effect movable body 500 may be operated at the time of the effect, the execution timing of the suggestion effect or the like suggesting that the high base state B, which is more advantageous than the high base state A, is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the movable passage body 400 is arranged on the front side of the effect movable body 500. In other words, the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are arranged so that their movable ranges overlap each other in a front view, but the movable ranges are shifted back and forth in a plan view so as not to overlap. Even if the movable body 500 is located at any position within the operable range, the movable body 500 does not come into contact with the movable passage body 400.

  Specifically, when the production movable body 500 is in the production body origin position and the movable passage body 400 is in the passage body origin position, the movable passage body 400 and the production movable body 500 do not contact each other (see FIG. A)), the movable movable body 500 is in the movable body advancing position, and the movable passage body 400 is not in contact with the movable body 400 even when the movable passage body 400 is in the movable body advance position (FIG. 15 (B)). reference).

  Although not shown, even if the production movable body 500 is located at an arbitrary position between the production body origin position and the production body advancing position, the movable passage body 400 and the production movable body 500 do not come into contact with each other. That is, since the movable passage body 400 and the production movable body 500 do not interfere with each other at any timing, the operation of one of the movable passage body 400 and the produced movable body 500 affects the other operation. Will not be affected. Furthermore, since the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are arranged such that the operable ranges do not overlap with each other by shifting in the front-rear direction, whether the second movable portion 402 is located at the deployed position or the non-deployed position. Regardless, the production movable body 500 does not interfere with the second movable portion 402.

  Further, the first movable portion 401 of the movable passage body 400 is a movable portion that is operated by the passage body motor 91 connected to the main board 11, and the first movable portion 511 and the second movable portion 512 of the production movable body 500. Is a movable part that is operated by the effect body motor 520 connected to the effect control board 12.

  In the small hitting game state, the first movable portion 401 first enters the second big winning opening 702B and stores the game ball P1 stored in the first storage portion 227 at the V winning opening 283 (when the game ball enters. The CPU 103 is provided with a second guide path 202A that guides the player to enter a winning opening) that triggers the control to the big hit game state. In other words, the first movable portion 401 is a movable portion for game related to the winning / non-winning lottery in which the winning / non-winning (whether or not to control the big hit) is drawn, while the first moving portion 511 and the second movable portion 512 are the first It is a movable part for production such as the movable part 401, which is not related to winning / winning lottery.

  In this way, when the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are provided on the one base member 450, the CPU 103 that controls the game controls the operations of both the movable passage object 400 and the effect movable body 500. In this case, the control load of the CPU 103 increases, which may affect the game. Therefore, with regard to the movable part that is not related to the game such as winning / winning lottery, the operation control is performed by the effect control CPU 120 which is another control means. By doing so, the processing load on the CPU 103 can be appropriately reduced.

  However, in this way, when the movable passage body 400 and the production movable body 500 for winning / winning lottery are mounted on the one base member 450, one operation of the movable passage body 400 and the production movable body 500 becomes the other operation. If they interfere with each other, and especially if the operation of the effect movable body 500 may affect the operation of the movable passage body 400, the fairness of the game can be maintained because the lottery for winning or winning, that is, the result of the game is affected. There is a risk of disappearing. Therefore, it is preferable that the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are provided so that one operation does not interfere with the other operation.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is shot toward the game area Y by the rotation operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started.

  In the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an enterable state (or a difficult-to-enter state in the after-opening time described later) during the execution period of the previous public figure game or on the basis of hitting a universal figure. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the middle (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the general-purpose game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), the general-purpose game based on the passage is not suspended. , A predetermined upper limit (for example, 4) may be reserved.

  In the variation display of the ordinary symbol, after starting the variation of the ordinary symbol, when the predetermined time which is the ordinary symbol variation time elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol which is the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a particular ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. In the present embodiment, as the fixed ordinary symbol, for example, a symbol or a symbol other than the number indicating "7", a regular symbol other than the regular symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result of the regular symbol is "normal symbol". It may not be "figure loss", but may be "universal loss". Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "universal pattern hit", the variable plate moves to the advance position and the variable winning ball device 6B becomes enterable, and the variable plate retracts after a predetermined time has elapsed. It moves to the position and the variable winning ball device 6B is in a difficult-to-enter state.

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  When the game ball enters (wins) the first start winning port during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state to be described later (first start prize) Occurs, but the first special drawing game based on the first starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the first special drawing game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). On the other hand, when the game ball enters (wins) the second starting winning opening (when the second starting winning occurs but the second special drawing game based on the second starting winning cannot be immediately executed), the entry is made. The execution of the based second special figure game is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 3).

  In the special figure game, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". It should be noted that if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the "big hit symbol" may be set. .. Further, if a special symbol different from the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated.

  After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled. It should be noted that, after the display result in the special drawing game is "big hit", the big hit game state may be controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

  In the small hitting game state, the second special winning opening 702B formed by the second special variable winning ball device 7B becomes enterable in a predetermined opening mode. In the small hitting game state, the second special winning opening door 702A of the second special variable winning ball device 7B is a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 1800 ms) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 8) of winnings. The second special winning opening 702B is opened in the period until a ball is generated. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 7B becomes advantageous for the player.

  In the small hitting game state, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 702B passes through the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the third count switch 24B of the game ball It is a "big hit (V prize big hit)" based on passage. That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 24B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 702B in the small hitting game state passes the fourth count switch 24C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 24C of the gaming ball.

  Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball, the first special winning opening door 701A of the first special variable winning ball device 7A causes a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Has elapsed or until a predetermined number (e.g., 8) of winnings have occurred, the first special winning opening 701B is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 7A is in an open state that is advantageous for the player. In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball, the first special variable winning ball device 7A is controlled to the open state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second special variable winning ball device 7B may be controlled to be in an open state.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "5", "7", or "10"). Even before the number of times the round has been executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball has not won in the first big winning opening). Good.

  After the jackpot gaming state in the present embodiment is finished, the time saving control (time saving control) is performed in a time saving state. In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the time saving state, one of the ending conditions is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 99 times) or the small hit has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or three times). It continues until it is established first. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a time cut (time cut, etc.).

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player, or a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure hit". The probability that the display result in the special figure game is "small hit" and the like are determined by the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return process is performed after the power is turned on. It is in the same controlled state as when it was not executed). The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state.

  If the big hit game state is not reached after the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled. It The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, after a game ball passes through a specific area and is controlled to a big hit game state, it is controlled to a high base state (time saving state).

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off, or the operation of the production movable body 500.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). When the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the small hit combination (“reach loss”) is displayed. (Also referred to as “”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for giving a notice of the small hitting reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative design. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the small hit reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that shows the small hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). .. As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, and the like, a solenoid drive signal, and the like.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, Various effects such as driving of the production movable body 500, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery are included).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the effect movable body 500 to the effect movable body 500 or a drive circuit for driving the effect movable body 500.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The production control CPU 120 is responsible for audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, lamp signal, etc.), and control of the production movable body 500 (supply of a signal for operating the production movable body 500). It may be executed.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 27A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 27A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also called a production design). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 27B, a determination result (preliminary determination result) whether the variable display result (also referred to as a variable display result) is “miss” or “small hit” Alternatively, different EXT data is set according to the determination result (small hit type determination result) as to which of the plurality of small hit types the variable display result is "small hit".

  In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 27B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 1" and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the preliminary determination result and the small hit type determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 2". The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the preliminary determination result and the small hit type determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “small hit 3”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 4" and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 5" and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “small hit 6” and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C07H is an eighth variable display result designation command for notifying the preliminary determination result and the small hit type determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 7". The command 8C08H is a ninth variable display result designation command for notifying the preliminary determination result and the small hit type determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 8". The command 8C09H is a tenth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “small hit 9” and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C0AH is an 11th variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 10" and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C0BH is a twelfth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “small hit 11” and the small hit type decision result. The command 8C0CH is a 13th variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit” and the small hit type is “small hit 12” and the small hit type decision result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed once (high. Base state A, a second game state designation command corresponding to a time saving state A), and a command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time saving control is performed three times (high base state B, time saving state B). And

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening is in a changed state from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit. The command A4XXH is a promotion effect start designation command for specifying the start of a promotion effect described later.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result designation command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command or the special winning opening opening notification command, for example, in response to the number of times the round is executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state described later, Different EXT data is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D100 is a V winning notification designating command for notifying that a V winning has occurred, that is, that the game ball has passed the third counting switch 24B and the third counting switch 24B has been turned on.

  Note that the commands shown in FIG. 27A are examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, and these commands may be used. Different commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command for identifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the fact that a game ball has won in each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability variation control or the time saving control is executed, or the like may be provided.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 28, in this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and a normal value. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the figure display result is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown) shown in FIG. 28, to update various numerical data by software, thereby causing a disturbance. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a "small hit" to the big hit game state, For example, it takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random number value used to determine the big hit type to be any of "small hits 1 to 10" when the variable display result is "small hit", and is, for example, "0". It takes a value in the range from "" to "299".

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of "997".

  The random number MR4 for determining the figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 is "per figure" or "missing figure". It is a random number value that is set, for example, a value in the range of "3" to "23".

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern of a special symbol. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern (PA1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” and a plurality of variation patterns (PB2-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. , PB2-2, PB2-3, PB2-4) are prepared in advance.

  The special figure variable display time of the plurality of variation patterns (PB2-1, PB2-2, PB2-3, PB2-4) is set longer than the variation pattern (PA1-1) corresponding to the case of "miss". Has been done. Further, in the high base state B that continues until the time-saving control is executed three times after the big hit ends, the variation time is longer than in the high base state A that continues until the time-saving control is executed once after the big hit end. The variation pattern PB2-4 is set to be executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29A, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the low base state or the high base states A and B, when the display result is a loss, the variation pattern PB1-1 When the display result is a small hit, the small hit variation pattern PB2-1 is decided. As shown in FIG. 29B, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the low base state, when the display result is a small hit, the small hit variation pattern PB2-2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (C), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the high base state A, the display result is a small hit, and the small hit variation pattern when the number of reserved memories of the special symbol is 2 to 4 PB2-1 is determined, and when the display result is a small hit and the number of reserved memories in the special figure is 0 to 1, a small hit variation pattern PB2-3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (D), as a variation pattern of the second special symbol in the high base state B, a small hit variation pattern PB2-4 is determined.

  In the present embodiment, for the fluctuation patterns PB1-1, PB2-1 to PB2-1 to 4, the symbol determination time (minimum stop display time of special symbols) is common to the low base state and the high base states A and B. It is set to 500 ms. Further, fluctuation patterns other than the above fluctuation patterns may be set, and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be arbitrarily changed.

  FIG. 30A shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is determined based on the random value MR1 for determining the special sign display result. Is a table referred to by.

  In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, or the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" or "miss" depending on whether it is a special figure game.

  In the special figure display result determination table, when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, in the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A More judgment values than a certain value are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". Thereby, in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is obtained when the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Compared with the probability (1/70 in the present embodiment) that it is determined to control the small hitting game state as "small hit", it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hitting game state is controlled. The probability is high (1/1 in this embodiment). In other words, the second special figure game is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game.

  If the second special figure game has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first special figure game, the small hit probability of the second special figure game is variously 1/2 to 1/5. This may be changed, and the special figure display result in the second special figure game may be "missed" with a predetermined probability. Even when "miss" is included as the special figure display result of the second special figure game in this way, the special figure display result of the second special figure game is smaller than that of the first special figure game by "small hit". It is preferable that the probability of being determined to control the small hitting game state as "becomes high."

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30B, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the first start winning hole during the previous execution of the special drawing game (the game ball is the first starting prize). If the special-character game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the special-character game based on the passage is held up to a predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 4), and the previous special-character game is executed. When the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening during the middle period (when the gaming ball passes through the second starting winning opening but the special figure game based on the passing cannot be executed immediately), based on the passing The special figure game is held up to a predetermined second upper limit number (for example, 3).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a first pending storage and a second pending storage, the CPU 103 displays the variable display of the second special drawing based on the second pending storage as the first special drawing based on the first pending storage. It is designed to be executed with priority over the variable display of.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30C, in the present embodiment, the ending condition of the high base state A executed after the big hit ends is the special figure game and the first special figure game after the big hit end The total number of variable display times with the special figure game using 2 special figures has reached 99 times, or the number of times the small hit game state has been executed after the end of the big hit (the second special figure game in the high base state A). The number of executions has reached the first number (for example, one), and is satisfied. On the other hand, the ending condition of the high base state B executed after the big hit is that the total variable display count of the special figure game using the first special figure and the special figure game using the second special figure after the big hit is It has reached 99 times, or the number of times the small hit game state has been executed after the end of the big hit (the number of times the second special figure game has been executed in the high base state B) has reached the second number (for example, 3 times). , Is satisfied. The high base states A and B are also terminated when the big hit game state is controlled.

  Further, the number of executions of the special figure game, which is the ending condition of the high base states A and B, is not limited to 99 times, but can be arbitrarily changed. Further, the number of times may be different between the high base state A and the high base state B. Further, the number of times of executing the small hitting game state, which is the ending condition of the high base states A and B, is not limited to the above-mentioned one or three times, but can be arbitrarily changed.

  FIG. 31A is an explanatory diagram showing the small hit type determination table A stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table A is a random number for determining the small hit type (MR4 when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed in the low base state and it is determined that the display result is a small hit. ) Is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to any one of small hit 1 to small hit 4. In addition, in the small hit type determination table A in the present embodiment, 0 to 134 are small hits and 1 to 135 to 269 are small in the range 0 to 299 that the random number (MR4) for hit type judgment can take. Wins 2,270 to 289 are assigned to small wins 3, and wins 290 to 299 are assigned to small hits 4.

  FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram showing the small hit type determination table B stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table B is for the hit type determination when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed in the high base states A and B and it is determined that the display result is a small hit. It is a table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit to any one of small hit 1 to small hit 4 based on a random number (MR4). In the small hit type determination table B according to the present embodiment, out of the range 0 to 299 of the random number (MR4) for determining the hit type, 0 to 134 is a small hit and 1 to 135 to 269 is a small hit. Wins 2,270 to 289 are assigned to small wins 3, and wins 290 to 299 are assigned to small hits 4.

  FIG. 31C is an explanatory diagram showing the small hit type determination table C stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table C is hit when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in the low base state or the high base states A and B, and it is determined that the display result is a small hit. It is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to any of small hit 5 to small hit 10 based on a random number (MR4) for type judgment. In addition, in the small hit type determination table C in the present embodiment, out of the range 0 to 299 that the random number (MR4) for the hit type determination can take, 0 to 39 are small hits and 5 to 40 to 89 are small hits. Hits 6, 90 to 99 are small hits 7, 110 to 129 are small hits 8, 130 to 179 are small hits, 180 to 239 are small hits 10, 240 to 259 are small hits 11, 260 Up to 299 are assigned to 12 small hits.

  In the present embodiment, the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 have the largest number of support balls in the rotary body 208 by opening the second special winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern A in the small hitting game state. It becomes possible to supply one. In addition, the small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 supply the support balls to the rotary body 208 at most three by opening the second big winning opening 702B twice based on the opening pattern B in the small hit game state. It will be possible. Also, the small hits 7 and 11 can supply a maximum of five support balls to the rotating body 208 by opening the second special winning opening 702B three times based on the opening pattern C in the small hitting game state. Also, the small hits 8 and 12 can supply the support balls to the rotating body 208 at most one by opening the second big winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern D in the small hitting game state. After that, after discharging the support balls, the support balls can be supplied once more to the rotating body 208 by opening the support balls once more.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed in which short-time opening of 148 ms is repeated twice or three times at 600 ms intervals in one opening. That is, in the opening pattern A, the opening control that repeats the short-time opening of 148 ms three times is executed once (see FIG. 50), and in the opening pattern B, the opening control that repeats the short-time opening of 148 ms three times is executed twice. In the opening pattern C (see FIG. 51), the opening control is repeated three times by repeating the short-time opening of 148 ms twice (see FIG. 52). In the opening pattern D, the opening control is repeated once by repeating the short-time opening of 148 ms three times (see FIG. 50), and after the support balls are discharged, the short-time opening of 148 ms is repeated three times. The opening control is executed once (see FIGS. 55 and 56).

  It should be noted that the short-time opening may be repeated twice or four times or more in one opening, or the opening for a time corresponding to the total time of the plurality of short-time opening may be performed once. Further, in the short-time opening of 148 ms, one game ball P on the upper surface of the second special winning opening door 702A can enter at the time of opening, but a plurality of game balls P can be opened at the opening of the second special winning opening door 702A. When flowing down the upper surface, a plurality of game balls P may be won when opening.

  In addition, the small hits 1 to 4 are executed when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit A in which the round game is executed seven times is executed. To be done. Also, for the small hits 1 and 2, when the small hit is in the low base state, it is controlled to the high base state A after the end of the big hit game state, and the small hits are made in the high base states A and B. In this case, the high base state B is controlled after the jackpot gaming state is over. For small hits 3 and 4, even if a small hit occurs in the low base state or the high base states A and B, it is controlled to the high base state B after the end of the big hit game state.

  In addition, the small hit 5-8, when the game ball passes the third count switch 24B during the small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit C is executed in which the round game is executed five times. To be done. In addition, the small hits 9 to 12 are executed when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit D in which the round game is executed 10 times is executed. To be done. Since the number of rounds of each jackpot A to D is one when the V winning is performed, the actual number of rounds is a value obtained by subtracting the V winning round from the prescribed number of rounds.

  Further, for the small hits 5 to 12, even if the small hits occur in the low base state or the high base states A and B, the high base state B is controlled after the end of the big hit game state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is triggered by the small hit in the first special figure game in the low base state, the high base state A is switched to the high base state A at a higher rate after the big hit ends. While being controlled, when a big hit is triggered by a small hit in the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game in the high base states A and B, the ratio is higher than that in the high base state A after the big hit. Controlled to high base state B.

  That is, in the low base state, the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being controlled to the high base state B after the big hit are low, but when the big hit is triggered by the small hit in the second special figure game in the high base state A. After the big hit, all are controlled to the high base state B in which the number of times is shorter than that in the high base state A, so that the probability of becoming a big hit when the small hit occurs in the second special figure game increases. Can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit is triggered by the small hit in the first special figure game in the low base state, the high base state A or the high base state B is controlled depending on the small hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the big hit is triggered by the small hit in the first special figure game in the low base state, the high base state A is controlled regardless of the small hit type. It may be done. Also, when the big hit is triggered by the small hit in the second special figure game in the high base states A and B, the high base state B is controlled regardless of the small hit type. Alternatively, it may be controlled to a low base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which either the high base state A or B is controlled after the jackpot is finished is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the low base state is set after the jackpot. You may have a small hit type controlled by the state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control is performed to either a high base state A that continues until the time saving control is executed once after the end of the big hit, or a high base state B that continues until the time saving control is executed three times. Although the mode having the small hit types 1 to 12 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving control is controlled to either the high base state that continues until it is executed twice or four times or more. You may have a small hit type.

  FIG. 32 (A) shows a variation pattern of a normal symbol determined in the low base state. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern PC1-1 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "Public figure hit" is prepared in advance, and the variation pattern corresponding to the case of "Public figure loss" is not prepared. In the fluctuation pattern PC1-1, the fluctuation display time of the ordinary figure is 3000 ms, and the symbol fixing time (the minimum stop display time of the normal symbol) is 4 ms.

  FIG. 32 (B) shows a variation pattern of a normal symbol determined in the high base states A and B. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern PC1-2 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “universal figure hit” is prepared in advance, and the variation pattern corresponding to the case of “variable figure loss” is not prepared. The fluctuation pattern PC1-2 has a fluctuation display time of 48 ms for ordinary figures, and a symbol determination time (minimum stop display time of normal symbols) of 4 ms. That is, the variable display time of the ordinary figure is shorter in the high base states A and B than in the low base state, but the symbol determination time is common to the low base state and the high base states A and B.

  FIG. 32 (C) shows the contents of opening the second starting winning opening based on the hitting figure. At the opening timing for opening the second start winning opening based on the winning figure (timing when the stopping figure is displayed), if the game state is the low base state, the opening time of the second starting winning opening is 16 ms, opening The subsequent time (the period during which the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is kept in the difficult-to-enter state) is 4048 ms. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high base state A or B at the opening timing (the timing at which the universal figure is stopped and displayed) for opening the second starting prize hole based on the hitting of the universal figure, the opening of the second starting prize hole is opened. The time is 5500 ms, and the time after opening (the period during which the variable winning ball device 6B is kept in the difficult-to-enter state) is 4048 ms.

  FIG. 32 (D) shows an example of the structure of the general figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the universal figure display result determination table, the variable display result is set as "per universal figure" before the fixed ordinary symbol which is the variable display result in the universal figure game is derived and displayed. 5 is a table that is referred to for determining whether or not to control the vehicle into an enterable state based on a random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination.

  In the general figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, the random number value MR4 for general figure display result determination is compared depending on whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state A or B. Numerical values (judgment values) are all assigned to the display result of "per ordinary drawing". That is, in the present embodiment, even if the game state is the low base state or the high base state A or B, the general figure display result has a predetermined probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) when the game is a general figure game. ), It is determined that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an enterable state as "universal figure".

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an example has been illustrated in which the figure display result is a figure hit with a probability of 1/1 in the figure game, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine the per-universal figure hit with a probability lower than the probability, that is, "universal figure loss".

  FIG. 32 (E) shows the contents of various decisions in the universal game. In the present embodiment, when the variable display start condition of the universal figure is satisfied on the basis of the game ball passing through the gate switch 21, whether the game state is the low base state or the high base states A and B Accordingly, whether or not to make a universal figure (actually, it should be a universal figure) and a universal figure variation pattern are determined.

  On the other hand, regarding the opening pattern (opening time) of the second starting winning opening, at the timing when the display result of the variable display of the universal game is derived and displayed, if the gaming state is the low base state, the short opening pattern (16 ms) When the gaming state is the high base state A or B, the long open pattern (5500 ms) is decided.

  In this way, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the figure-to-be-drawn figure display result of the figure-to-body figure game is a figure-to-be-drawn figure and the figure-to-be-drawn figure variation pattern at the timing when the variable display start condition of the figure to be held is satisfied. 2 Regarding the opening pattern (opening time) of the start winning hole, the gaming state is low base state and high base state at the timing when the display result of the variable display of the universal figure game is derived and displayed (the symbol for the universal figure is stopped) It is determined depending on whether it is A or B.

  Further, the condition for closing the second starting winning opening is that the opening time has elapsed after opening the second starting winning opening regardless of whether the second starting winning opening is opened in a short opening pattern or a long opening pattern. It is established on the basis of either that, or two gaming balls are won (detected by the second starting opening switch 22B) even before the opening time has elapsed, and the variable winning ball device 6B is established. It is controlled to be difficult to enter. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the difficult-to-enter state by winning two game balls, but one or three or more game balls are won. Therefore, the variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to be in the difficult-to-enter state.

  Further, the universal figure fixing time (4 ms), the second starting winning opening opening time (16 ms or 5500 ms), the post-opening time (4048 ms), etc. are not limited to the above times, but can be variously changed.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to cause the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controlling the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the ordinary figure game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 34 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Example of control of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hitting game state)
Next, the control content when the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S118 to S120 in the small hit game state will be described based on FIGS. 36 (A) to (D). FIG. 36: (A) is a figure which shows the control pattern of a 2nd special variable winning a prize ball apparatus, (B) is the content of 1st control and 2nd control, (C) is a description which shows the flow of control of a 1st pattern. FIG. 6D is an explanatory diagram showing a control flow of the second pattern.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), the CPU 103 performs control according to the type of small hit in the small hit game state. Specifically, the upper limit of support balls is 1,3,5,9 for one small ball, the upper limit of support balls is 3,4,6,10 for small balls of 3 support balls, and the upper limit of support balls is 5 small balls. In the case of 7 or 11 hits, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on the first pattern, and when the upper limit of the support balls is 1 + 1 and the small hit is 8 or 12, it is based on the second pattern. Then, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled.

  The first pattern is a pattern for executing a first control that allows a game ball to enter the second special winning opening 702B, and the second pattern is a game for the second special winning opening 702B after performing the first control. It is a pattern for performing the second control that allows the ball to enter again. The control contents of the first control and the second control are mainly (1) opening of the second special winning opening 702B (control of the third solenoid 83), (2) storing and releasing of game balls in the first storing mechanism 204. (Control of fourth solenoid 84), (3) Storage and release of game balls in second storage mechanism 205 (control of fifth solenoid 85), (4) Advance and retreat of movable passage body 400 (passage body motor 91) , Control of the passage body origin position sensor 92 and passage body advance position sensor 93), and (5) ejection of the support ball (control of the sixth solenoid 86).

  Of these, (1) is the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B, (2) ~ (5) is a guide route (eg, the first path) through which the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 702B can pass. This is a storage mechanism control that includes an accessory provided on the guide route 201, the second guide routes 202A and 202B, and the third guide routes 203A and 203B). The opening control is executed based on a different pattern depending on the small hit type, whereas the storage mechanism control is executed based on a pattern common to all the small hits regardless of the small hit type.

  The flow of control based on the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 36C. The CPU 103 will perform the first control (small hit) with the start of the small hit game state. The opening control of (1) above based on the opening control process data corresponding to the type, and the above (2) to (5) storage mechanism control based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all the small hit types) Start. Then, after the opening control is completed, the storage of the game ball (game ball) of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, and it is determined whether or not the game ball (game ball) has entered the V winning opening 283. When the discharge of the ball is completed, the first control is ended, and the small hit game state is ended accordingly. In the opening control in the first control, the second big winning opening 702B is opened a number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) according to the small hit type.

  It should be noted that the CPU 103 continuously executes the storage mechanism control until the number of entered balls that has entered the second special winning opening 702B and the number of discharged balls (the number of entering and leaving balls) match after the discharge of the support balls is completed. .. Also, if the number of entering balls and the number of ejecting balls (the number of entering and exiting balls) do not match even after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) from the discharge of the support balls, it is determined as an ejection error and the game is stopped ..

  On the other hand, the flow of control based on the second pattern corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (D). The CPU 103 performs the first control (in small hit type according to the start of the small hit game state). The above-mentioned opening control (1) based on the corresponding opening control process data and the above-mentioned (2) to (5) storage mechanism control based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all the small hit types are started. .. After the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B, the storage of the game ball (game ball) of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, and the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning port 283. After determining whether or not the discharge of the support balls is completed, the first control is ended. In the opening control in the first control, the second special winning opening 702B is opened once.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes the second control (the opening control of (1) based on the opening control process data corresponding to the small hit type and the above (2) based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all the small hit types. )-(5) Storage mechanism control) is started. After the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B, the storage of the game ball (game ball) of the first storage mechanism 204 is released and the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning hole 283. After determining whether or not the discharge of the support balls is completed, the second control is ended. In the opening control in the second control, the second special winning opening 702B is opened once.

  In this way, in the case of the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11, the CPU 103 opens the second special winning opening 702B a number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) according to the small hit type, and the entered game ball is V. After determining whether or not the game has entered the winning opening 283, the second special variable winning ball device is based on the first pattern in which the first control is performed until all the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 702B are discharged. Control 7B.

  On the other hand, in the case of small wins 8 and 12, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has entered by opening the second special winning opening 702B a number of times corresponding to the small hit type (for example, once) has entered the V winning opening 283. After the determination, the first control is performed until all the game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are discharged, and then the number of times the second big winning opening 702B is set according to the small hit type (for example, 1 After determining whether or not the game ball that has entered by opening has entered the V winning port 283, the second control is performed until all the game balls that have entered the second winning port 702B are discharged. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on one pattern.

  In the second pattern, the case where the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning opening 283 in the first control and the case where the game ball (game ball) does not enter the V winning opening 283 in the first control In any case, that is, the second control is executed regardless of whether or not the V winning is generated.

  That is, since the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8, 12 are small hits in which the second big winning opening 702B is opened once in the first control, the player performs the first control. If it is, it is difficult to determine whether the small hit type is small hit 1, 3, 5, 9 or small hit 8, 12. Therefore, even if the player performs the first control based on the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, the first control is performed based on the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12. It can be expected to be done. That is, since it can be expected that the second control is performed after the first control (the second special winning opening 702B is opened for the second time), the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 36C and 36D, the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 corresponds to the small hits 8 and 12 while only the first control is executed. In the second pattern, the second control is executed after the first control, so in the case of small hits 8 and 12, a period in which the small hits are controlled to be in a gaming state rather than in the case of small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11. Becomes longer.

  Therefore, with regard to the opening control, in the case of the small hits of 8 and 12, there are two chances of winning and losing lottery in which the winning ball can enter the V winning opening 283: once in the first control and once in the second control. Therefore, the open control process data having a longer execution period than the case of the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 is used.

  On the other hand, with respect to the storage mechanism control, the storage mechanism control process data used for the small hits 8 and 12 are also used for the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11. That is, the common storage mechanism control process data corresponding to all the small hit types are used, and in the case of the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11, the storage mechanism control ends by the normal discharge of the game balls. It is supposed to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily distinguishing the small hit type due to the difference in the operation mode of the various storage mechanisms, and even if a plurality of storage mechanism control process data corresponding to the small hit type is not prepared, Since the storage mechanism controlling process data can be used for all the small hits, the data capacity of the ROM 101 can be suitably reduced.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs the second control at a higher rate when the number of support balls is small when performing the first control than when the number of support balls is large. In other words, when the number of support balls is small when the first control is performed (one support ball) and the small hit is 8 or 12, the number of support balls is large when the first control is performed (three support balls or (5) Since the second control is performed at a higher rate (100% rate) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7 and 11, the game balls passing through the predetermined area in the first control are At least, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second control will be performed.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S118 of FIG. 35 as a small hit opening pre-process.

  In the small hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 103 first decrements the small hit display time timer (S201), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202). If the small hit display time timer has not timed out (S202; N), the small hit opening pre-processing is ended, while if the small hit display time timer has timed out (S202; Y), the small hit type is selected. A corresponding opening control process table is set (S203), the opening control process timer is started (S204), and opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is started according to the contents of the set opening control process data ((S203). S205).

  Next, a storage mechanism control process table common to all the small hit types is set (S206), a storage mechanism control process timer is started (S207), and the storage mechanism is controlled according to the contents of the set storage mechanism control process data. After starting the control of (S208), the transmission setting of the hit start designation command according to the small hit type is performed (S209). The hit start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9", which is the value corresponding to the small hitting open process (S30) (S210), and the small hit opening pre-process is ended.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 35 as the small hit opening process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the opening control process timer by -1 (S211), and then decrements the value of the storage mechanism control process timer by -1 (S212). Next, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the second special winning opening 702B (S213), and when it is the opening timing of the second special winning opening 702B (S213; Y), the second special winning opening 702B is opened. It is controlled to the open state (S214), and when it is not the opening timing of the second special winning opening 702B (S213; N), the process proceeds to S215. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the second special winning opening 702B (S215), and if it is the closing timing of the second special winning opening 702B (S215; Y), the second special winning opening 702B is opened. The closed state is controlled (S216), and when it is not the closing timing of the second special winning opening 702B (S215; N), the process proceeds to S217.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the storage release timing of the first storage mechanism 204 (S217), and when it is the storage release timing of the first storage mechanism 204 (S217; Y), the first storage mechanism 204 is stored. The release state is controlled (S218), and when the storage release timing of the first storage mechanism 204 is not reached (S217; N), the process proceeds to S219. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the storage release timing of the second storage mechanism 205 (S219), and when it is the storage release timing of the second storage mechanism 205 (S219; Y), the second storage mechanism 205 is stored. The release state is controlled (S219), and when the storage release timing of the second storage mechanism 205 is not reached (S219; N), the process proceeds to S221.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the advancing timing of the movable passage body 400 (S221), and when it is the advancing timing of the movable passage body 400 (S221; Y), the movable passage body 400 is moved from the origin position to the advancing position. When the movable passage member 400 is moved (S222) and it is not the advance timing of the movable passage member 400 (S221; N), the process proceeds to S223. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the retreat timing of the movable passage body 400 (S223), and when it is the retreat timing of the movable passage body 400 (S223; Y), the movable passage body 400 is moved from the advanced position to the origin position. If the movable passage member 400 is moved (S224) and it is not the retracting timing of the movable passage member 400 (S223; N), the process proceeds to S225.

  Further, it is determined whether or not it is the discharge timing of the support ball (S225), and if it is the discharge timing of the support ball (S225; Y), the discharge port 287 is controlled to the open (discharge) state (S226). If it is not the discharge timing of the support ball (S225; N), the process proceeds to S227.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 24B is turned on (S227). If the third count switch 24B is not turned on, the process proceeds to S231 (S227; N), and if the third count switch 24B is turned on (S227; Y), the third count switch 24B is already turned on. It is determined whether or not, that is, the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the third count switch is set (S228). When the V winning flag is set, the process proceeds to S231 (S228; Y), and when the V winning flag is not set (S228; N), the V winning flag is set (S229). Then, the transmission setting of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 is set (S230). The V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above.

  If the third count switch 24B is not turned on in S227, the V winning flag is set in S228, or the process of S230 is completed, a wait for discharge indicating a support ball discharge wait time It is determined whether the time timer is operating (S231). If it is not the discharge waiting time (S231; N), the process proceeds to S232, and if it is the discharge waiting time (S231; Y), the process proceeds to S234.

  In S232, it is determined whether or not the release control process timer has timed out (S232). When the release control process timer has not timed out (S232; N), the small hitting open process is terminated. If the release control process timer has timed out (S232; Y), the discharge wait time timer is set to a value (for example, 4000 ms) according to the discharge wait time (S233), and the small hit is being released. The process ends.

  In S234, after the value of the discharge waiting time timer is decremented by 1 (S234), it is determined whether or not the discharge waiting time timer is out (S235). If the discharge waiting time timer has not timed out (S235; N), whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B and the number of game balls that have been discharged (the number of balls coming and going) match, Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls (the number of approach balls) detected by the second count switch 24A and the number of game balls (the number of discharge balls) detected by the fourth count switch 24C match. Yes (S236).

  When it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B and the number of game balls that have been discharged match (S236; Y), the player has entered the second special winning opening 702B during the discharge waiting time. Assuming that all the game balls have been discharged normally, set a value according to the discharge end time in the discharge end time timer (S237), clear the discharge wait time timer (S238), and then decrease the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated to "10" which is the value corresponding to the winning end process (S120) (S239), and the small hit opening process is ended. When it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B and the number of game balls that have been discharged do not match (S236; N), since the discharge waiting time is still in progress, the process for opening the small hits. To finish.

  Further, when the discharge waiting time timer is timed out in S235, that is, when the number of game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B does not match the number of discharged game balls during the discharge waiting time (S235; N), the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 702B was not normally discharged for some reason such as staying in the route, or it is possible that an illegal winning is possible, and the transmission setting of the error designation command is performed. (S240), the process shifts to the loop process, and the game cannot be progressed. The error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above.

  In addition, although the opening control ends in S232 when the opening control process timer times out, until the number of balls entering and exiting matches during the discharge waiting time set based on the opening control process timer timing out. Alternatively, the storage mechanism control is continuously executed until the discharge waiting time elapses without matching.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S120 of FIG. 35 as the small hit ending process. In the small hit ending process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the discharge end time timer by -1 (S250), and then determines whether or not the discharge end time timer is out (S251). If the discharge end time timer has not timed out (S251; N), the small hit end processing ends, and if the discharge end time timer has timed out (S251; Y), the V winning flag is set. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a V winning is generated during the small hitting game state (S252).

  If the V winning flag is set in S252 (S252; Y), it is determined that the V winning occurs during the small hitting game state, the V winning flag is cleared (S253), and the big hitting flag for starting the big hit is set. Yes (S254). Next, the big hit type is determined according to the small hit type (S255), after setting the big hit type buffer value (S256), the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (S114). 4 "(S257), and the small hit ending process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set in S252 (S252; N), V winning does not occur during the small hit game state (missing), and the value of the special symbol process flag is special symbol normal processing ( The value corresponding to S110) is updated to "0" (S258), and the small hit ending process is ended.

(Operation example of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state)
Next, the situation of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hitting game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. FIG. 40: (A)-(E) is explanatory drawing which shows the opening state of the 1st time in the small hitting game state of small hitting 2, 4, 6, 10. 41 (A) to (E) are explanatory views showing the second open state in the small hitting gaming state of the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. 42A, 42B, 42A, 42B, 42A, 42B, 42C, 42D, 42E, 42D, 42E, 42D, 42E, 42D, 42E, 42D, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 40E, 50E, 40E, 40E, 50E, 40E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 41E, 42E, 41E, 42E, 41E, 42E, 42E, 42E, 42E. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example 2 shown. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a situation where the storage of the game balls in the first storage section is released after the movable passage body has moved. 44, (A) ~ (D) is an explanatory view showing the flow of V winning, (E) ~ (G) is an explanatory view showing the flow of loss, (H) is a game held in the loss ball holding portion It is explanatory drawing which shows the situation where a ball is discharged. 45A to 45C are explanatory diagrams showing V winning rates. 46, (A) when the game ball is not held in the lost ball holding portion, (B) when one game ball is held in the lost ball holding portion, (C) is the game ball in the lost ball holding portion In the case where three game balls are held, (D) is a table showing the V winning rate when five game balls are held in the lost ball holding portion. 47, (A) is a plan view of the rotating body showing a state in which the game ball passes through the discharge port, (B) is a sectional view taken along line HH of (A), and (C) is the game ball falling from the discharge port. Is a sectional view of the rotating body showing a state in which (D) is a plan view of the rotating body showing a state in which ball catching occurs at the discharge port, (E) is a sectional view taken along line JJ of (D), and (F) is a sphere. It is sectional drawing of a rotary body which shows the state which is performing the bite elimination operation.

  The operation mode of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hitting game state is different only in the opening control (opening number and opening timing) of the second special winning opening 702B according to the small hit type, and other devices ( For example, the operation modes of the first storage mechanism 204, the second storage mechanism 205, the rotating body 208, and the like always operate in the same manner from the start to the end of the small hit, and therefore, in the following, small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 The small hit game state in 1 will be described as an example, and the description of the small hit game state in small hits 1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10 will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, only the opening pattern (the number of times of opening and the opening timing) of the second special winning opening 702B differs according to the type of small hit, and other devices (for example, the first storage mechanism 204 and the second storing mechanism 204). The operation mode of the storage mechanism 205, the rotating body 208, and the like) has exemplified the mode in which the small hit is always operated in the same manner from the start to the end, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. The operation modes of the first storage mechanism 204, the second storage mechanism 205, the rotating body 208, and the like may be different.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the CPU 103 controls to open the second special winning opening door 702A twice based on the opening pattern B when the small hit types are small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. Start. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the first opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is started at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small hitting game state was started. When the second special winning opening 702B changes from the closed state to the open state, the game balls can be won in the second special winning opening 702B.

  When the small hit game is started, the first storage plate 222 is located at the storage position, and the movable passage body 400 is located at the passage body origin position. The rotating body 208 is always rotating clockwise in a plan view at a predetermined speed from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the small hit game is started. The distribution member 242 always operates based on a predetermined operation pattern (see FIGS. 50 to 54) after the small hit game state is started, regardless of the small hit type.

  The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 702B flows down the first guide path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), the first game ball P1 that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is guided to the second guiding path 202A, and is regulated from flowing down by the first storage plate 222. It is stored in the first storage unit 227. Further, the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second special winning opening 702B was opened.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), the second game ball P2 that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is transferred to the second guidance route 202A by the game ball P1 stored in the first storage section 227. Inhibition of entry leads to induction of the third induction pathway 203A. Here, since the distribution member 242 is in the second rotation state, the game ball P2 guided to the third guide path 203A comes into contact with the tip portion of the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242, and thus the holding portion 242a. Since the entry into the second storage portion 247 is blocked, only one of the second storage portion 247 is stored upstream of the tip portion of the holding portion 242a. Further, as shown in FIG. 40D, the third game ball P3 that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is guided from the discharge port 210a to the discharge route 210 by the game ball P2 in the second storage section 247. Is discharged outside the gaming machine.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40E, the CPU 103 changes the distribution member 242 to the first rotation state after the first opening, and then changes the distribution member 242 to the second rotation state again, and then the first time. Return to a moving state. As a result, one game ball P2 stored in the second storage portion 247 drops into the inflow port 203C, is guided by the third guiding path 203B, and is guided to the rotating body 208.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is started at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the first opening is completed. The first game ball P11 that has entered the second special winning opening 702B since the second opening has started is blocked by the game ball P1 stored in the first storage section 227 from entering the second guide route 202A. As a result, the vehicle is guided to the third guiding route 203A. Here, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), since the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state in the second opening, the game ball P11 guided to the third guiding path 203A is the distribution member. It is stored in the holding part 242a of 242. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41C, the second game ball P12 that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is stored in the second storage unit 247 on the upstream side of the game ball P11.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the third game ball P3 that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is guided from the discharge port 210a to the discharge route 210 by the game ball P12 in the second storage section 247. Is discharged outside the gaming machine.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 41 (E), the CPU 103 changes the distribution member 242 to the second rotation state after the second opening, so that one gaming ball P11 stored in the holding portion 242a. Falls into the inflow port 203C, is guided by the third guiding path 203B, and is guided to the rotating body 208. Then, by turning to the first turning state, the game ball P12 stored in the second storing section 247 flows into the holding section 242a of the sorting member 242, and returns to the first turning state again. As a result, the game ball P12 that has flowed into the holding portion 242a falls into the inflow port 203C, is guided by the third guiding path 203B, and is guided to the rotating body 208.

  As described above, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, at the first opening, one game ball P1 (game ball) is stored in the first storage section 227 and one game ball P2 rotates. It is guided to the body 208, and two game balls P11 and P12 are guided to the rotating body 208 by the second opening. That is, if two game balls P can be won in the second big winning opening 702B in each of the opening of the first time and the second time, a total of three game balls P2, 11, 12 (support balls) will be the rotating body 208. (See FIG. 51).

  Further, in the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, at the first opening, one game ball P1 (game ball) is stored in the first storage section 227, and one game ball P2 is provided as the rotating body 208. Be guided to. That is, if two game balls P can be won in the second big winning opening 702B by the first opening, a total of one game ball (support ball) can be guided to the rotating body 208 (see FIG. 50). ). In addition, in the small hits 7 and 11, one game ball P1 (game ball) is stored in the first storage part 227 at the first opening, and one game ball P2 is guided to the rotating body 208, Two game balls (game balls) are guided to the rotating body 208 by the second opening, and two game balls (game balls) are guided to the rotating body 208 by the third opening. That is, if two game balls P can be won in the second big winning opening 702B in each of the first to third opening, a total of five game balls (support balls) can be guided to the rotating body 208 ( (See FIG. 52).

  Next, an example of a situation in which the game balls P2, P11, P12 guided to the third guiding route 203B are held by the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, in Example 1, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the game ball P2 is guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guiding path 203B at the first opening, the position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B. If the standing wall portion 271 is approaching, the game ball P2 is held in the third guiding path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the lost ball holding portion 273A reaches the position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B, the game ball P2 held on the third guiding path 203B is inclined by the inclined bottom surface. It flows down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the game balls P11, P12 are guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guiding path 203B in the second opening, the standing wall is positioned at a position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B. If the part 271 is approaching, the game balls P11 and P12 are held in the third guiding path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the lost ball holding portion 273D reaches the position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B, the game ball P11 held in the third guiding path 203B is inclined by the inclined bottom surface. The game ball P12 that has flowed down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273D and then held by the third guiding path 203B flows down by the inclined bottom surface and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273E. In this case, three game balls P2, P11, P12 are held in the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273D, 273E on both sides of the V winning ball holding portion 272.

  In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 42 (E), when the game ball P2 is guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guiding path 203B at the first opening, the standing wall is positioned at a position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B. If the portion 271 is approaching, the game ball P2 is held in the third guiding path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (F), when the lost ball holding portion 273D reaches the position corresponding to the third guide path 203B, the game ball P2 held on the third guide path 203B is inclined by the inclined bottom surface. It flows down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273D.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the game balls P11 and P12 are guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guiding path 203B in the second opening, the standing wall is positioned at a position corresponding to the third guiding path 203B. If the part 271 is approaching, the game balls P11 and P12 are held in the third guiding path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the lost ball holding portion 273A reaches the position corresponding to the third guide path 203B, the game ball P11 held on the third guide path 203B is inclined by the inclined bottom surface. It flows down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273A. In addition, after a lapse of time, the game ball P12 guided to the third guide path 203B flows down by the inclined bottom surface and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273C. In this case, three game balls P2, P11, P12 are held in the lost ball holding unit 273A on one side of the V winning ball holding unit 272 and the separated lost ball holding units 273C, 273D.

  In this way, when the game ball P2 reaches the rotating body 208 at the first opening, the game ball P11 reaches the rotating body 208 at the second opening, and the game ball P11 rotates at the second opening. Although the period (time lag) from when the game ball P12 reaches the rotating body 208 after reaching 208 is almost the same, any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is located at a position corresponding to the third guiding route 203B. Since it is uncertain whether or not it will arrive, the game balls P2, P11, P12 are not always held in the same lost ball holding unit among the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E shown in Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. ..

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), the CPU 103 passes the passage at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hitting game state (timing after the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is finished). The movable passage body 400 located at the passage body origin position on the right side of the image display device 5 is moved to the passage body advance position by the body motor 91. As a result, the second guide path 202A and the second guide path 202B communicate with each other to form one second guide path 202A, 202B, and when the movable passage body 400 moves to the passage body advance position, the decoration member 404L. , 404R moves from the non-deployed position to the deployed position. As described above, the second guide path 202B is moved to form one second guide path, and the decorative members 404L and 404R are moved from the non-deployed position to the deployed position to change the form of the movable passage body 400. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. In addition, in FIG. 43 (A), the image and the like displayed on the image display device 5 are omitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 moves the movable passage body 400 to the passage body advancing position, and then moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84. As a result, one game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage section 227 flows down the second guidance paths 202A and 202B, and the game ball P1 that flows down the second guidance paths 202A and 202B rotates. It falls to a position slightly rearward from the rotating shaft 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the body 208. The player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the second guide path 202B from between the left and right decorative members 404L and 404R that have moved to the expanded position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), since the rotating shaft 90A of the rotating body 208 is tilted toward the front side, the rotating shaft 90A has fallen to a position slightly rearward of the rotating shaft 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the rotating body 208. The game ball P1 flows down with the upper surface of the disk portion 270 facing forward. Here, at the timing when the game ball P1 flows down toward the front side, even when the game ball P1 reaches the standing wall portion 271 without entering the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, from the upper surface of the disc portion 270 to the upper portion of the standing wall portion 271. Since the projection length L30 to the contact position with the game ball in is longer than the radius R of the game ball, the game ball P1 passes over the standing wall portion 271 and falls out of the rotating body 208 due to the momentum of the flow. It is prevented from doing.

  Next, an example of a situation in which the game ball P1 discharged to the upper surface of the disc portion 270 of the rotating body 208 is held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 or the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E will be described with reference to FIG. ..

  First, explaining the flow of V winnings, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the game ball P1 that has fallen to the upper slope side from the rotation axis 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 is directed toward the lower slope side. Run down. Then, when the game ball P1 reaches the peripheral inclination lowermost part of the disk part 270, for example, when the lost ball holding part 273D moves as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the lost ball holding part 273D plays a game. Since the ball P11 is held, the game ball P1 is guided to the side of the game ball P11 by preventing the game ball P11 from entering the lost ball holding portion 273D.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), after the game ball P1 guided to the side of the game ball P11 stays at the lowermost peripheral edge of the disk part 270 by the inner surface of the rotating standing wall part 271, Next, the game ball P12 prevents the game ball P12 from entering the lost ball holding portion 273E that has moved to the lowermost part of the inclination. Then, when the V winning ball holding section 272 reaches the lowermost part of the peripheral inclination, the V winning ball holding section 272 enters the V winning ball holding section 272. At this time, the game ball P1 is held on the V winning ball holding portion 272 by being placed on the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), when the V winning ball holding portion 272 rotates and reaches the position corresponding to the V winning port 283, the game ball P1 enters the V winning port 283 and the third count switch. The V prize is generated by being detected by 24B.

  Next, explaining the flow of loss, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), the game ball P1 that has fallen from the rotation axis 90A on the upper surface of the disc portion 270 to the upper slope side flows down toward the lower slope side. To do. Then, when the game ball P1 reaches the lowermost peripheral edge of the disk portion 270, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the lost ball holding portion 273B in which the game balls P2, P11, P12 are not held. Is moved, the game ball P1 is allowed to enter the lost ball holding portion 273B and is held. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), since all the game balls P1, P2, P11, P12 are held by the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273B, 273D, 273E, no V winning is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (H), the game balls P1, P2, P11, P12 held by the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273B, 273D, 273E are driven by the opening / closing plate 289 during a discharge standby period described later. Then, the discharge port 287 is opened to guide the player to the lost-sphere guiding path 288.

  In this way, when the game ball P1 dropped on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 reaches the peripheral inclination lowermost part of the disk portion 270, if any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E moves, the lost ball is held. If the game ball P is not held in the parts 273A to 273E, the game ball P1 enters and is held in the lost ball holding parts 273A to 273E, and finally is discharged without V winning, while the lose ball is held. If the game ball P is held in the holding portions 273A to 273E, the game ball P blocks the entry. Further, when the standing wall portion 271 has moved, the game ball P1 is retained at the lowermost peripheral edge inclination portion by the standing wall portion 271.

  That is, when the V winning ball holding unit 272 moves while the gaming ball P1 (game ball) stays in the lowermost part of the peripheral inclination, the V winning ball holding unit 272 moves while being held by the V winning ball holding unit 272. By entering the winning opening 283, a V winning is generated. Further, when any one of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E moves in a state where the game ball P1 (game ball) stays in the peripheral inclination lowermost portion, the game ball P is moved to the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. If is held, the stay is continued without entering, and if not held, it is moved to the discharge port 287 while entering and held, and discharged outside the game machine without V winning.

  As described above, the probability (V winning rate) that the game ball P1 dropped on the upper surface of the disc portion 270 is held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the V winning occurs (V winning rate) is shown in FIGS. 45 (A) (B) (C). As shown in. Specifically, the period during which the game ball P1 can enter the V winning ball holding unit 272 is not limited to the period in which the V winning ball holding unit 272 passes through the lowermost peripheral edge portion (passing point S), but actually, An area (hatched area in FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C)) including the standing wall portion 271 on the rotation direction side (the lost ball holding portion 273E side) of the V winning ball holding portion 272 passes the passing point S. It will be a period to do.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the game ball is not held in any of the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E, the V winning rate is about 16.7%. Further, as shown in FIG. 45B, when one game ball P is held in the lost ball holding portion 273E adjacent to the rotation direction side of the V winning ball holding portion 272, the V winning rate is about 33. It becomes 0.3%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45C, the game balls P are respectively held by the adjacent lost ball holding portion 273E on the rotational direction side of the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the adjacent lost ball holding portion 273D. If so, the V winning rate is about 50%.

  In this way, when the game ball P is held continuously in the rotation ball side holding ball holding portions 273E, 273D of the V winning ball holding portion 272, the game ball P held by these losing ball holding portions 273A to 273E. A continuous standing wall portion for retaining the game ball P1 in the disc portion 270 is formed by the plurality of standing wall portions 271. As a result, the period in which the shaded area passes through the passing point S becomes longer, so that the V winning rate. Also rises. In the table shown in FIG. 46 (A), the V winning rate in the combination in which 0 game balls are held in the lost ball holding parts 273B to 273E is shown, and in the table shown in FIG. 46 (B), The V winning ratio in the combination in which one game ball is held in the lost ball holding units 273B to 273E is shown, and in the table shown in FIG. 46 (C), the lost ball holding units 273B to 273E have three games. The V winning rate in the combination in which the balls are held is shown, and the V winning rate in the combination in which five game balls are held in the lost ball holding units 273B to 273E is shown in the table shown in FIG. 46 (D). Has been done.

  As shown in the tables of FIGS. 46 (A) to (D), when the game ball P is continuously held in the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273B on the side opposite to the rotation direction of the V winning ball holding portion 272, or , If the game ball P is not held in the lost ball holding unit 273E next to the V winning ball holding unit 272, the game ball P1 is lost by the game ball held in the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E. Since the entry into 273B to 273E is blocked and the entry is not entered into the V winning ball holding portion 272, the V winning rate does not increase.

  Further, even if one game ball is held in any one of the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E, the V winning rate when it is held in the lost ball holding unit 273E becomes about 33.3% in the middle. Even if three game balls are held in any three of the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E, the V winning rate is about 16.7%, which is the lowest depending on the combination. Further, even when two game balls are continuously held in the adjacent missing ball holding units 273A to 273E among the missing ball holding units 273A to 273E, the V winning ball holding unit 272 and the missing ball holding unit 273E are straddled. In the case where the V winning ball is held continuously or in the losing ball holding portions 273A and 273B which are opposite to the rotation direction of the V winning ball holding portion 272, the V winning rate is the lowest, about 16.7%. Become.

  That is, before the storage of the game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage unit 227 is released, the game ball P (support ball) that is guided to the rotating body 208 after being stored in the second storage unit 247. ), The number of lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E in which the entry of the game ball is blocked increases and the V winning rate increases, so that a maximum of five support balls can be guided to the rotating body 208. 7, 11, a maximum of 3 support balls are guided to the rotating body 208, a small hit 2, 4, 6, 10 and a maximum of 1 support ball is guided to the rotating body 208, a small hit 1, 3 The probability of being a big hit by the V winning (the player's advantage) is high in the order of 5, 9, but the number of support balls is small depending on which of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E holds the support ball. Even if there are more support balls than Because it can V winning rate is increased, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball P held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E moves on the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265 as the rotating body 208 rotates (FIG. 14 (B)). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), the game ball P held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E passes through the discharge port 287 in a state where the discharge port 287 is closed by the opening / closing plate 289. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 289 is arranged so as to close the discharge port 287 from the lower surface side, when passing through the discharge port 287, the opening / closing plate 289 drops once from the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265 and passes over the opening / closing plate 289. After that, the user rides on the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 47B, since inclined portions 287A and 287B that are inclined downward toward the discharge port 287 are formed on the front and rear sides of the discharge port 287 in the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265. The step between the discharge port 287 and the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265 can be reduced to smoothly move the game ball P. Further, as shown in FIG. 47C, when the opening / closing plate 289 opens the discharge port 287, the game ball P that has moved to the discharge port 287 can be smoothly moved in the falling direction by the inclined portion 287A.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47 (D) and (E), with the opening / closing plate 289 opening the discharge port 287, the game ball P held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is discharged from the discharge port 287. When falling, the game ball P may be caught between the opening peripheral edge of the discharge port 287 and the standing wall portion 271, and ball catching may occur.

  Therefore, the CPU 103 moves the opening / closing plate 289 to the open position to open the discharge port 287 after the small hitting game state is finished as described later, and the game ball P held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. After the discharge standby period for dropping from the discharge port 287 ends, during the discharge end period, ball bite elimination operation control is performed in which the opening / closing operation of moving the opening / closing plate 289 from the open position to the closed position by the sixth solenoid 86 is repeated twice. Then keep it in the open position. By performing this ball bite elimination operation control, the opening / closing plate 289 collides with the game ball P sandwiched between the opening peripheral edge of the discharge port 287 and the standing wall portion 271, and the impact causes the game ball P to drop or hold a lost ball. Since it is returned to the portions 273A to 273E, the ball biting state can be eliminated.

(Second guide route 202A, 202B)
Next, the second guide paths 202A and 202B will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a schematic explanatory view showing the structures of the second guide path and the rotating body. 49A shows a state in which an aspherical object is stored in the first storage portion, FIG. 49B shows a state in which the storage in the first storage portion is released but the nonspherical object does not flow down, (C) 4] is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which storage in the first storage unit is released and an aspherical object flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage part 227 is a second guide path 202A extending obliquely downward to the right from the first storage part 227, and a passage body. The movable passage body 400 that has moved to the advanced position is guided to the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the rotary body 208 by the second guide path 202B that is linearly formed from the upper end to the lower end.

  In the present embodiment, A. The first time from the stop display of the small hit symbol (fixing of the symbol) to the release of the storage state of the game ball P1 stored in the first storage section 227 is constant, and B. The second time from when the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227 is released to the rotating body 208 after the game ball P1 flows down the second guide paths 202A and 202B. It is said that.

  In this way, the first time of A and the second time of B are designed to be substantially constant regardless of the type of small hit, and thus the C.I. Depending on where the V winning ball holding portion 272 is located at the timing when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage portion 227 is inclined at the peripheral edge of the rotating body 208. It is possible to predict which one of the V winning ball holding unit 272 and the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E will be able to enter when reaching the lowest position.

  Therefore, although it is possible to increase the V winning probability by arbitrarily adjusting the second time of B, it is difficult to increase the flow-down speed of the game ball P1 and hit the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an attempt is made to adjust the flow-down speed of the gaming ball P1 by using the above, a vibration detection sensor (not shown) or the like provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Therefore, a plurality of types of non-spherical objects X (see FIG. 49) different from the regular game ball P (also referred to as an appropriate game ball) and having different downflow speeds flowing down the second guide paths 202A and 202B are prepared, According to the position of the V winning ball holding portion 272 at the timing when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the flow velocity at which the V winning is possible is predicted, and the object X of the type corresponding to the predicted flow velocity is launched, and the second big There is a problem in that it is possible to illegally increase the V winning probability by winning the prize in the winning opening 702B and storing it in the first storing unit 227.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball P that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is guided to the V winning opening 283 so that it can enter the V winning opening 283, and the non-spherical shape is allowed while allowing the appropriate game ball P to move. An obstruction unit for obstructing the movement of the object X is provided.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), the second bottom surface 212B of the first storage part 227 in the forming member forming the second guide path 202A is the first storage part on the bottom surface of the second guide path 202A. Since the downward inclination angle is smaller than that of the third bottom surface 212C and the fourth bottom surface 212D that configure the region other than 227 (see FIG. 7A. Θ2 <θ1, θ3, θ4), the movement of the non-spherical object X is prevented. It constitutes an inhibition part for inhibiting.

  For example, depending on the position of the V winning ball holding portion 272 at the timing when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming ball P1 is released after the storage state of the gaming ball P1 stored in the first storing portion 227 is released. In order to adjust the second time to reach the rotating body 208 by flowing down the 2 guide paths 202A and 202B, for example, when the small hitting game state is started, the flowing speed is lower than the proper game ball. A case will be briefly described in which the slow object X is replaced with a proper game ball and is launched by the launching device, and an illegal act of storing in the first storage portion 227 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which an icosahedron is applied is illustrated as an example of the non-spherical object X, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-spherical polyhedron other than an icosahedron may be used. Can be used. It is also conceivable to reduce the flow-down speed by attaching a drug to the surface of the spherical body. The slower speed than the proper speed is a drug that can prevent movement (rolling) or slippage due to rotation of the game ball and can be easily attached to the game ball. That has a transparency that is not easily recognized as being present, that is, a liquid that is transparent so that the friction and coupling force with the passage of the incorrect sphere is greater than the friction and coupling force (medium) with the passage of the proper sphere It is conceivable that, for example, a chemical agent such as an acrylic or urethane liquid adhesive which is an adhesive having adhesiveness is used.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (B1), the object X launched in place of the proper game ball has a non-spherical shape, and thus has a lower flow-down speed than the proper game ball. The downward inclination angle of the second bottom surface 212B of the first storage part 227 is smaller than that of the third bottom surface 212C and the fourth bottom surface 212D other than the first storage part 227. Therefore, even if the object X stored on the second bottom surface 212B of the first storage part 227 is released from the storage state by moving the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position, the object X remains on the second bottom surface 212B. Since there is a high possibility of staying without flowing down, it is possible to preferably prevent the object X from flowing down at a timing when a V winning is possible.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 49 (B2), when the object X flows down the second bottom surface 212B when the first storage plate 222 moves from the storage position to the release position and the storage state is released, the second guide A third bottom surface 212C having a larger descending inclination angle than the other fourth bottom surface 212D is formed in a region of the bottom surface of the forming member forming the path 202A on the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B. When flowing down the 212C, the downflow speed increases. As a result, the time when the object X flows down the second guide paths 202A and 202B can be made closer to the time when the proper game balls flow down the second guide paths 202A and 202B, so that the passing speed of the game balls is made uniform. By doing so, it is possible to suppress fraud.

(Flow of small hit game state)
Next, the flow of the small hitting game state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the flow of the period in which the second big winning opening is opened in the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing the flow of the period during which the second big winning opening is opened in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow of the period in which the second big winning opening is opened in the small hits 7 and 11. FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V winning is generated after the first storage mechanism is released in the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing a flow in which no V winning occurs after the first storage mechanism is released in the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V winning occurs after the first opening in the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing a flow in which no V winning is generated after the first opening in the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V winning is generated after the second opening in the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing a flow in which an error occurs due to a mismatch of incoming and outgoing balls in the small hits 7 and 11.

  First, when the first special figure game or the second special figure game (variable display of special symbols) is started based on the first start prize or the second start prize, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first special figure game or In synchronization with the second special figure game, the variable display of the decorative design is started in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, when the small hitting design is stopped and displayed in the special drawing game, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating “small hit”.

  As a combination of the small hit symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a symbol composed of the same number (for example, “1”) is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, A small hitting pattern M (also referred to as a special symbol) which is displayed only in the case of a small hit in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is a combination that is stopped and displayed. The combination of the small hit symbols may be, for example, a combination in which a special symbol dedicated to the small hit is stopped and displayed in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, or a combination of symbols composed of numbers. Good. In the case of a combination of numbers, a combination of uniform symbols may be used, or a combination of different odd or even symbols may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the small hit pattern M, there are a plurality of small hit patterns M having different background colors. The effect control CPU 120 is for the small hit symbol type determination shown in FIG. 65 (B) according to the small hit type identified from the variable display result designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 when starting the variable display of the decorative symbol. Using the table, it is determined which of the small hitting patterns M whose background color is “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” is to be displayed.

  Specifically, when the small hit type is small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, the small hit pattern M with a background color of "blue" is determined at a rate of 70%, and the small hit with a background color of "green" The pattern M is determined at a rate of 30%. When the type of small hits is 8 or 12, the small hit pattern M with a background color of "blue" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the small hit pattern M of a background color of "green" is determined at a rate of 45%. Then, the small hitting pattern M whose background color is "red" is determined at a rate of 5%. When the type of small hits is 2, 4, 6, 10, the small hit pattern M with a background color of "blue" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the small hit pattern M with a background color of "green" is 50%. And the small hitting pattern M whose background color is "red" is determined at a rate of 10%. When the type of small hit is 7, 11, the small hit pattern M whose background color is "red" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the small hit pattern M whose background color is "rainbow" is determined at a rate of 80%. To do.

  When the small hit type having a large maximum number of support balls that can be guided to the rotating body 208 is determined, the small hitting pattern M having a background color of “red” or “rainbow” is easily displayed and can be guided to the rotating body 208. When the small hit type with a small maximum number of support balls is determined, the small hit pattern M having a background color of “blue” or “green” is likely to be displayed. That is, the degree of expectation of V winning increases in the order of the background colors "rainbow", "red", "green", and "blue". Therefore, before it is controlled to the small hitting game state, it is possible to suggest that the small hitting type with a large number of support balls is determined by the background color of the small hitting pattern M that is stopped and displayed. It is possible to increase the expectation of the person.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has a small-hit symbol M having a different background color according to which of the small-hit types 1 to 10 is displayed as the variable-hit display result of the special symbol. By displaying the stop, it is possible to execute the V winning suggestion effect indication that suggests that the game ball P enters the V winning opening 283, so that the player pays attention to the mode of the small hit symbol M. The interest can be improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the small hit type determined by the background color of the small hit pattern M can be suggested, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit pattern M It may be possible to suggest the small hit type determined by the aspect of the design different from the background color, such as the characters to be displayed, the size of the characters, and the size of the design.

  Next, based on FIGS. 50 to 52, the first half flow of the small hitting game state of each small hit 1 to 7, 9 to 11 {1/2} and the small hitting game state of each small hit 8, 12 respectively The first half of the flow {1/3} will be described. First, when the CPU 103 starts the control of the small hitting game state after the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the special drawing game as "small hit", based on the opening control process data according to the small hitting type. The opening control of the two major winning openings 702B is started, and the storage mechanism control is started based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all the small hit types. Specifically, the control for starting the distribution member 242 based on the predetermined operation pattern by the fifth solenoid 85 is started, and the timing Ta1 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hitting game state is started, At Tb1 and Tc1, the open / close plate 289 is moved from the open position to the closed position by the sixth solenoid 86 to close the discharge port 287, and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are made to be able to hold the support balls.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the case of the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8, 12, the CPU 103 starts the timing Ta0 at which the control of the small hit game state is started from the first opening waiting time (for example, about 60). At the timing Ta2 when (second) has elapsed, the second big winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the first opening control based on the opening pattern A. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second big winning opening 702B.

  When the first game ball P wins in the second big winning opening 702B after starting the first opening control, the game ball P passes through the first guiding path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. After being guided, it is guided to the second guiding path 202A, and the first storage plate 222 regulates the flow-down, so that it is stored in the first storage part 227. Next, the second game ball P that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is blocked by the first game ball P stored in the first storage section 227 from entering the second guide route 202A. Then, the vehicle is guided to the third guiding route 203A and reaches the second storage section 247. At this time, since the distribution member 242 has changed to the second rotation state, only one game ball P2 is stored in the second storage portion 247 on the upstream side of the tip of the distribution member 242. Further, the third and subsequent game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are guided to the second storage section 247, and then discharged from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210.

  Then, after the first opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 is changed from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, at the timing Ta3 when the distribution member 242 is changed to the second rotation state again, the second storage section 247 is generated. The game ball P (support ball) stored in is guided by the third guiding path 203B to the rotating body 208, and is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

  As described above, in the case of the small hits 1, 3, 5 and 9, one game ball is stored in the first storage section 227 by performing the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern A. Thus, it is possible for the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208 to hold at most one support ball, but it is possible to cause the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E to hold two or more support balls. It is considered a difficult jackpot.

  In addition, for the small hits 8 and 12, one game ball is stored in the first storage part 227 by opening the second big winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern D and entering the game ball. Thus, it is possible for the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208 to hold at most one support ball, but it is possible to cause the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E to hold two or more support balls. Have difficulty.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51, in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the CPU 103 has a second opening waiting time (for example, about 50 seconds) from the timing Tb0 when control of the small hit game state is started. At the elapsed timing Tb2, the second big winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the first opening control based on the opening pattern B. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second big winning opening 702B.

  When the first game ball P wins in the second big winning opening 702B after starting the first opening control, the game ball P passes through the first guiding path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. After being guided, it is guided to the second guiding path 202A, and the first storage plate 222 regulates the flow-down, so that it is stored in the first storage part 227. Next, the second game ball P that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is blocked by the first game ball P stored in the first storage section 227 from entering the second guide route 202A. Then, the vehicle is guided to the third guiding route 203A and reaches the second storage section 247. At this time, since the distribution member 242 has changed to the second rotation state, only one game ball P is stored in the second storage portion 247 on the upstream side of the tip of the distribution member 242. Further, the third and subsequent game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are guided to the second storage section 247, and then discharged from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210.

  Then, after the first opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 is changed from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, the second storage unit 247 is changed again at the timing Tb3. The game ball P (support ball) stored in is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the first support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. ..

  Next, the CPU 103 starts the second opening control at the timing Tb4 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first opening control was completed. All the game balls P that have won the second big winning opening 702B in the second opening control are prevented from entering the second guiding route 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage section 227. It is guided to the third guiding route 203A and reaches the second storage section 247. In the second opening control, the distribution member 242 is changed to the first rotation state, so that the two game balls P are stored in the second storage section 247 and the third and subsequent game balls P are discharged. It is discharged to the discharge path 210 from the outlet 210a.

  Then, at the timing Tb5 when the opening control for the second time ends and the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state, the first game ball stored in the second storage section 247. P (support sphere) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the second support sphere is held in any of the lost sphere holding portions 273A to 273E. Next, after the distribution member 242 changes from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, at the timing Tb6 when the distribution member 242 changes to the second rotation state again, the second one stored in the second storage section 247. The game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the third support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

  As described above, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is performed twice based on the opening pattern B, so that one winning ball is stored in the first storage section 227. It is possible to store the maximum of three support balls in the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208, but to hold the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of four or more support balls. Is considered a difficult jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of small hits 7 and 11, the CPU 103 has a timing Tc2 at which a third opening waiting time (for example, about 35 seconds) elapses from the timing Tc0 at which control of the small hit game state is started. Then, the second big winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the first opening control based on the opening pattern C. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second big winning opening 702B.

  When the first game ball P wins in the second big winning opening 702B after starting the first opening control, the game ball P passes through the first guiding path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. After being guided, it is guided to the second guiding path 202A, and the first storage plate 222 regulates the flow-down, so that it is stored in the first storage part 227. Next, the second game ball P that has entered the second special winning opening 702B is blocked by the first game ball P stored in the first storage section 227 from entering the second guide route 202A. Then, the vehicle is guided to the third guiding route 203A and reaches the second storage section 247. At this time, since the distribution member 242 has changed to the second rotation state, only one game ball P is stored in the second storage portion 247 on the upstream side of the tip of the distribution member 242. Further, the third and subsequent game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are guided to the second storage section 247, and then discharged from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210.

  Then, after the first opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 is changed from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, at the timing Tc3 when the distribution member 242 is changed to the second rotation state again, the second storage section 247 is generated. The game ball P (support ball) stored in is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the first support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. ..

  Next, the CPU 103 starts the second opening control at the timing Tc4 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the first opening control was completed. All the game balls P that have won the second big winning opening 702B in the second opening control are prevented from entering the second guiding route 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage section 227. It is guided to the third guiding route 203A and reaches the second storage section 247. In the second opening control, the distribution member 242 is changed to the first rotation state, so that the two game balls P are stored in the second storage section 247 and the third and subsequent game balls P are discharged. It is discharged to the discharge path 210 from the outlet 210a.

  Then, at the timing Tc5 when the second opening control ends and the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state, the first game ball stored in the second storage section 247. P (support sphere) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the second support sphere is held in any of the lost sphere holding portions 273A to 273E. Next, at the timing Tc6 when the distribution member 242 changes from the second rotation state to the first rotation state and then changes to the second rotation state again, the second one stored in the second storage section 247. The game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the third support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

  Next, the CPU 103 starts the third opening control at the timing Tc7 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second opening control was completed. All the game balls P that have won the second big winning opening 702B in the third opening control are prevented from entering the second guiding route 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage section 227. It is guided to the third guiding route 203A and reaches the second storage section 247. In the third opening control, since the distribution member 242 is changed to the first rotation state, two game balls P are stored in the second storage section 247 and the third and subsequent game balls P are discharged. It is discharged to the discharge path 210 from the outlet 210a.

  Then, at the timing Tc8 when the third opening control ends and the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state, the first game ball stored in the second storage portion 247. P (support sphere) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the fourth support sphere is held by any of the lost sphere holding portions 273A to 273E. Next, at the timing Tc9 when the distribution member 242 changes from the second rotation state to the first rotation state and then changes to the second rotation state again, the second one stored in the second storage section 247. The game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the fifth support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

  As described above, in the small hits 7 and 11, the opening control of the second big winning opening 702B is performed three times based on the opening pattern C, so that one game ball is stored in the first storage section 227 and is rotated. If all the lost ball holding parts 273A to 273E of the body 208 can hold up to 5 support balls, that is, if 6 game balls can be won in the second big winning opening 702B. , A V-winning rate of 100% is a small hit.

  As described above, when the CPU 103 starts the control of the small hitting game state, the sorting member 242 always operates in common based on the predetermined operation pattern regardless of whether the small hitting type is the small hits 1 to 12. On the other hand, since the opening patterns A to D of the second special winning opening 702B are different depending on the small hit type, the opening timing and the number of times of opening with respect to the operation pattern of the distribution member 242 are changed, so that the game ball P is changed depending on the small hit type. The operation mode of the distribution member 242 when it reaches the second storage mechanism 205 (whether the first rotation state or the second rotation state) is different. By doing this, in the case of a small hit, how many game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, how many support balls are rotating bodies. Since it is difficult to understand whether or not the player is guided by 208, it is possible to avoid the monotonous nature of the game and improve the interest.

  That is, since the opening patterns A to D of the second special winning opening 702B are different depending on the type of small hit, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different and the third guide paths 203A and 203B. The number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 after being guided to, that is, the number of support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is different, and accordingly the V winning rate (big hit probability) Since the game changes, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game and improve the interest.

  More specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a game that is stored in the first storage mechanism 204 depending on the number of support balls that enter the second special winning opening 702B and are stored by the second storage mechanism 205. Not only the ratio of balls passing through the V winning opening 283 changes, but also the opening patterns A to D of the second big winning opening 702B differ depending on the type of small hit, so that the support stored by the second storing mechanism 205 is changed. Since the number of balls changes, the V winning rate does not only change depending on the number of support balls stored by the second storing mechanism 205, but also the V winning rate depends on the small hit type and the winning probability of each small hit type. Since the game will change, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game and improve the interest.

  Next, based on FIGS. 53 and 54, the second half flow {2/2} of the small hitting game state common to the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the CPU 103 moves the movable passage by the passage body motor 91 at a timing T20 when a predetermined time (for example, about 80 seconds) elapses from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hitting game state is started. The body 400 is moved from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position. Then, at the timing T22 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T21 when the movement of the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position is completed, the fourth solenoid 84 causes the first storage plate 222 to move from the storage position to the release position. Move to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53, when the winning ball stored in the first storage section 227 reaches the rotating body 208 and then enters the V winning ball holding section 272 and is held, the rotating body 208 rotates. When the V winning ball holding portion 272 is rotated to a position above the V winning port 283, the V winning ball holding unit 272 drops into the V winning port 283, and when detected by the third count switch 24B, the CPU 103 determines that a V winning jackpot has occurred. ..

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54, when the CPU 103 moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84 at timing T22, the game balls stored in the first storage section 227 rotate. After reaching the body 208, if it is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning jackpot does not occur.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the CPU 103 causes the timing T22 when the storage of the first storage portion 227 is released to be performed for a predetermined time (for example, the game ball in which the storage of the first storage portion 227 is released is the second guide). At the timing T23 when the time required to flow down the routes 202A and 202B, enter the V winning opening 283 and reach the third count switch 24B), the movable passage body 400 is moved to the passage body by the passage body motor 91. Evacuate from the advance position to the origin position of the passage body. Then, the operation of changing the distribution member 242 from the first rotation state to the second rotation state is repeated three times at a timing T25 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T24 when the movable passage body 400 reaches the passage body origin position. As a result, the game ball P remaining in the second storage mechanism 205 can be guided to the rotating body 208 due to some trouble.

  Further, the sixth solenoid 86 moves the opening / closing plate 289 from the closed position to the open position to open the discharge port 287. As a result, the support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are discharged from the discharge port 287.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a process of adding and updating the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) every time a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24A after starting the control of the small hitting game state. At the same time, every time the third count switch 24B for detecting the V winning ball and the fourth count switch 24C for detecting the lost ball detect the game ball, the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) is subtracted and updated. Running.

  Then, the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) becomes “0” from the timing T25 when the discharge port 287 is opened until the discharge ball waiting time (for example, 40 seconds) elapses, that is, At the timing T26 when the number of entering balls that have entered the second special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of discharged balls (the number of balls entering and leaving) that have been discharged match, all the game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are discharged. It is determined that The discharge ball waiting time is indefinite, and the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) becomes "0", or the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) does not become "0", It ends when seconds have passed.

  Next, the opening / closing plate 289 is opened by the sixth solenoid 86 from the timing T26 when the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) becomes “0” to the elapse of the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds). After repeating the opening / closing operation of moving from the open position to the closed position twice, and performing the ball bite elimination operation control for maintaining the open position, the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds) elapses at timing T27, and The control of the hit game state is ended, and the control of the big hit game state (the period before the big hit opening) is started. Note that, in addition to the ball bite elimination operation control, a release operation control in which the rotating body 208 is reversely rotated for a predetermined time may be performed.

  Next, based on FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the flow {2/3} of the middle stage common to the small hits 8 and 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the CPU 103 moves the movable passage by the passage body motor 91 at a timing T20 when a predetermined time (for example, about 80 seconds) elapses from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hitting game state is started. The body 400 is moved from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position. Then, at the timing T22 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T21 when the movement of the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position is completed, the fourth solenoid 84 causes the first storage plate 222 to move from the storage position to the release position. Move to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55, when the winning ball stored in the first storage section 227 reaches the rotating body 208 and then enters the V winning ball holding section 272 and is held, the rotating body 208 rotates. When the V winning ball holding portion 272 is rotated to a position above the V winning port 283, the V winning ball holding unit 272 drops into the V winning port 283, and when detected by the third count switch 24B, the CPU 103 determines that a V winning jackpot has occurred. ..

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56, when the CPU 103 moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84 at timing T22, the game balls stored in the first storage section 227 rotate. After reaching the body 208, if it is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning jackpot does not occur.

  Next, as illustrated in FIGS. 55 and 56, the CPU 103 causes the timing T22 at which the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released to be performed for a predetermined time (for example, the game ball in which the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released is the second guide At the timing T23 when the time required to flow down the routes 202A and 202B, enter the V winning opening 283 and reach the third count switch 24B), the movable passage body 400 is moved to the passage body by the passage body motor 91. Evacuate from the advance position to the origin position of the passage body. Then, the operation of changing the distribution member 242 from the first rotation state to the second rotation state is repeated three times at a timing T25 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T24 when the movable passage body 400 reaches the passage body origin position. As a result, the game ball P remaining in the second storage mechanism 205 can be guided to the rotating body 208 due to some trouble.

  Further, the sixth solenoid 86 moves the opening / closing plate 289 from the closed position to the open position to open the discharge port 287. As a result, the support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are discharged from the discharge port 287.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, the CPU 103 opens the discharge port 287 in order to continue the above-described opening control and storage mechanism control regardless of whether or not a V winning has occurred in the first opening control. At the timing T30A when a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing T25 at which the support balls are discharged and the support balls are discharged, the second special winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the second opening control based on the opening pattern D. .. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second big winning opening 702B.

  Next, based on FIG. 57, the second half flow {3/3} of the small hit game state common to the small hits 8 and 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 103 causes the passage body motor 91 to move the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body at a timing T30 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T30A when the second opening control is started. Move to position. Then, at a timing T32 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T31 when the movement of the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position is completed, the fourth solenoid 84 causes the first storage plate 222 to move from the storage position to the release position. Move to.

  When the winning ball stored in the first storage unit 227 reaches the rotating body 208 and then enters and is held by the V winning ball holding unit 272, the V winning ball holding unit 272 is rotated by the rotation of the rotating body 208. When is dropped above the V winning opening 283 and drops into the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B, the CPU 103 determines that a V winning jackpot has occurred.

  On the other hand, although not particularly shown, the CPU 103 moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84 at timing T32, so that the game balls stored in the first storage section 227 are rotated by the rotating body 208. If the player holds the ball in any one of the lost ball holders 273A to 273E after reaching, the V winning jackpot does not occur.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 103 causes the CPU 103 to release the storage of the first storage unit 227 for a predetermined period of time (for example, the game ball in which the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released is the second guide route 202A, At the timing T33 when the time required to flow down 202B, enter the V winning opening 283 and reach the third count switch 24B) has elapsed, the movable passage body 400 is moved from the passage body advance position by the passage body motor 91. Retract to the origin position of the passage body. Then, at a timing T35 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T34 when the movable passage body 400 reaches the passage body origin position, the operation of changing the distribution member 242 from the first rotation state to the second rotation state is repeated three times. As a result, the game ball P remaining in the second storage mechanism 205 can be guided to the rotating body 208 due to some trouble.

  Further, the sixth solenoid 86 moves the opening / closing plate 289 from the closed position to the open position to open the discharge port 287. As a result, the support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are discharged from the discharge port 287.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a process of adding and updating the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) every time a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24A after starting the control of the small hitting game state. At the same time, every time the third count switch 24B for detecting the V winning ball and the fourth count switch 24C for detecting the lost ball detect the game ball, the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) is subtracted and updated. Running.

  Then, the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) becomes “0” in the period from the timing T35 when the discharge port 287 is opened until the discharge ball waiting time (for example, 40 seconds) elapses, that is, At the timing T36 when the number of entering balls that have entered the second special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of discharged balls (the number of entering and leaving balls) that have been discharged match, all the game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are discharged. It is determined that The discharge ball waiting time is indefinite, and the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) becomes "0", or the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) does not become "0", It ends when seconds have passed.

  Next, the opening / closing plate 289 is opened by the sixth solenoid 86 from the timing T36 when the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) becomes “0” until the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds) elapses. After the opening / closing operation of moving from the open position to the closed position is repeated twice, and after the ball bite elimination operation control for maintaining the open position is performed, the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds) elapses at timing T37, and the small The control of the hit game state is ended, and the control of the big hit game state (the period before the big hit opening) is started. Note that, in addition to the ball bite elimination operation control, a release operation control in which the rotating body 208 is reversely rotated for a predetermined time may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 103 is common to all the small hits 1 to 12 and the timing at which the discharge ball waiting time (for example, 40 seconds) elapses from the timing T25 (T35) when the discharge port 287 is opened. In TE, the count value of the approaching ball number counter (not shown) has not become "0" despite performing the ball bite elimination operation control, that is, the ball entering the second special variable winning ball device 7B. When the number and the number of balls discharged (the number of balls coming in and out) do not match, it is determined that an error has occurred in which all the game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B have not been discharged.

  When the CPU 103 determines that the number-in / out-number mismatch error has occurred at the timing T28, the first guide route 201, the second guide routes 202A and 202B, the third guide routes 203A and 203B, the rotating body 208, and the first storage mechanism 204. It is possible that an abnormality such as a ball clogging (including a ball clogging due to an illegal act using an aspherical object as described in FIG. 49) occurs in any of the second storage mechanisms 205. Given that, in the main side error processing of S22 shown in FIG. 34, predetermined abnormal processing (for example, determination of error type, transmission setting of error designation command of S240 shown in FIG. 38, output setting of security signal, etc.) is performed. While executing, in the information output process of S23, a security signal is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a manner corresponding to the error (abnormality). The processing to be executed.

  The security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) that causes a game stop state is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) having a relatively low priority is output. , Is output during a fixed time after the error determination, or is not output. As for the “error of the number of comings and goings inconsistency” of the present embodiment, the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a fixed time (for example, 4 minutes) after the power is turned on again. Is set to.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an error notification image (not shown) indicating that an error has occurred on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command, and outputs an error sound or the like to the speaker. The error notification process output from 8L and 8R is executed.

  Incidentally, the CPU 103 ends the small hitting game state after the discharge ball waiting time has elapsed, so as not to shift to other special symbol process processing (S301 to S307) before the discharge ball waiting time has elapsed. Therefore, the player is prevented from suffering a disadvantage due to the start of the special symbol variation display and the big hit game while the abnormality occurs.

(About various effects in the small hit game state)
Next, various effects during the small hit by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. 59: (A) is a table showing winning promotion effect types, (B) is a view showing a promotion mode A, and (C) is a view showing a promotion mode B. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing an operation example of the effect pattern A in (A), the effect pattern B (with V winning) in (B), and the operation pattern B (without V winning) in (C). 61A and 61B are timing charts showing an operation example of the effect pattern C. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 120, during the small hit game, according to the opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the first control and the opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control. In addition to accelerating the operation (action) of shooting a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 702B, a time gauge corresponding to the remaining period of the opening period (predetermined period) of the second special winning opening 702B (Fig. 59 (B ) (Refer to the hatched portion in (C)) A winning promotion effect (predetermined effect) including an updating operation and a storage performed in response to the release of the storage of the support balls and the winning balls that have won the second special winning opening 702B. It is possible to execute after the release effect and the opening period (predetermined period) of the second special winning opening 702B, and shows that the winning ball has won the V winning opening 283 and the V winning big hit has occurred. (Advantageous production) , Game balls are the loss effect indicating that the V winning jackpot Te loss without winning the V winning opening does not occur, enabling execution.

  First, the prize winning promotion effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the control for opening the second special winning opening 702B is performed during the small hitting game, the effect control CPU 120 wins before the timing at which the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started. As the promotion effect image, an upward arrow image Z1 indicating that there is a second special winning opening 702B above the image display device 5 in the display area of the image display device 5 and a character image Z2 indicating "Aim at the top!" , A character image Z3 of "Challenge" indicating that it is an opportunity to generate a V prize, and a voice and sound effect of "Aim at the top!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp. By illuminating 9 or the like, the player is prompted to win the game ball into the second special winning opening 702B, and the time gauge corresponding to the remaining period of the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B is updated. By displaying the performance of time gauge image Z4, it is capable of executing winning promoting effect of notifying the remaining time of winning promotion and opening period of the second bonus prize hole 702B.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (A), the effect control CPU 120 can execute the winning promotion effect based on any of the effect patterns A to C.

  More specifically, the effect pattern A is a pattern that is executed when the small hit type is one of the small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 or the small hits 7 and 11, and the effect pattern B is the small hit type. The small hit is any one of 1, 3, 5, and 9, and the effect pattern C is the pattern executed when the small hit type is one of the small hits 8 and 12. ing. These effect patterns A to C have the same winning promotion effect image shown in FIGS. 59 (B) and (C), but the opening period effect image update operation, that is, the time gauge update operation mode is different.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (A) and FIG. 60 (A), the effect pattern A is in a state where the gauge is MAX (predetermined) at a timing Ta1 before the timing Ta2 at which the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started. A time gauge image Z4 (display mode of display is a specific mode) is displayed, and a gauge is displayed according to the remaining period of the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B from the timing Ta2 when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started. At a timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B is gradually decreased, the gauge is "0", that is, after the remaining period is "0", the time gauge image Z4 is erased. ..

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the open pattern A, the second special winning opening 702B is opened once, but in the case of the open pattern B, the second special winning opening 702B is opened twice, and in the case of the open pattern C. Since the second special winning opening 702B is opened three times, in the case of opening patterns B and C, an opening period including a plurality of opening periods (for example, from the start of the first opening to the end of the last opening). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time gauge image Z4 is displayed according to each opening to display the remaining period of each opening period. It may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), when the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is finished and the V winning determination is performed, the discharging of the support balls is finished. The loss effect (see FIG. 62 (G)) is performed until timing Ta5. Further, when the V winning occurs at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second big winning opening 702B is finished and the V winning determination is performed, the V winning jackpot production A (Fig. 62 ( Refer to F)).

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 60 (B) (C), the effect pattern B is that the gauge is MAX at a timing Ta1 before a timing Ta2 at which the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started. The time gauge image Z4 in the state is displayed, and from the timing Ta2 when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started, the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B, and At the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the two major winning openings 702B has ended (closed), the gauge is larger than “0” and smaller than “MAX”, that is, the remaining time period remains in the time gauge image Z4. Is maintained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), at a timing Ta4 at which a V winning determination is made as to whether or not a V winning has occurred, if a V winning occurs, the time gauge image Z4 is erased, and a V winning jackpot effect is produced. Move to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), if the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4, the display of the time gauge image Z4 is maintained, and the time gauge image Z4 is displayed at the timing Ta5 when the discharge of the support balls is finished. Erased.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the V winning occurs at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is finished and the V winning determination is performed, the timing Ta5 when the discharging of the support balls is finished. When the V winning jackpot production A is performed until then, and as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second winning port 702B is completed and the V winning determination is performed. The losing effect is performed until the timing Ta5 at which the discharge of the support balls ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 61 (A) (B), the effect pattern C is a gauge at a timing Ta1 before a timing Ta2 at which the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started. The time gauge image Z4 in the state of MAX is displayed, and the gauge gradually increases in accordance with the remaining period of the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B from the timing Ta2 when the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started. At the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends (closes), the gauge is more than “0” and less than “MAX”, that is, the remaining period remains. The display of the time gauge image Z4 is maintained in the remaining state.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), the support balls are discharged whether or not the V winning is generated at the timing Ta4 when the V winning determination is made as to whether or not the V winning is generated. The display of the time gauge image Z4 is maintained until the timing Ta6, which is before the timing Ta7 when the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started after the ending timing Ta5, and the gauge remains at the timing T6. The display is changed to the display of the time gauge image Z4 in the mode in which the mode is returned to “MAX”.

  Then, from the timing Ta7 when the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started, the gauge gradually decreases in accordance with the remaining period of the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B, and the second big winning opening 702B. At the timing Ta8 when the open period of (3) ends (closes), the time gauge image Z4 is erased after the gauge becomes “0”, that is, the remaining period becomes “0”.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4 when the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B is finished and the V winning determination is performed, the support balls are discharged. The loss effect is performed until the timing Ta5 at which is ended. Further, when the V winning occurs at the timing Ta9 when the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B is finished and the V winning determination is performed, the V winning jackpot production A is performed until the timing Ta10 when the discharging of the support balls ends. Done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the V winning occurs at the timing Ta4 when the first opening of the second winning hole 702B is finished and the V winning determination is performed, the second winning hole After the second opening of 702B ends, until the timing Ta10 at which the discharge of the support balls ends, the V winning jackpot effect B (see FIG. 64D) having a different mode from the V winning jackpot effect A is performed.

  Here, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10 corresponding to the effect pattern A, the second big winning opening 702B is opened twice in the first control, and the small hits 7 and 11 are the first in the first control. The two major winning openings 702B are opened three times. For the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 corresponding to the effect pattern B, the second special winning opening 702B is opened once in the first control. For the small hits 8 and 12 corresponding to the effect pattern C, after the second big winning opening 702B is opened once by the first control, the second big winning opening 702B is newly opened by the second control. It will be held once again.

  In other words, for the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8, 12, the second big winning opening 702B is opened once at the same timing in the first control, so that the player can play the second big winning opening. It is difficult to determine whether the small hit type is small hit 1, 3, 5, 9 or small hit 8, 12 by the opening pattern of 702B. Then, the effect pattern B is a mode in which the time gauge image Z4 is erased and the gauge remains at the timing Ta4 when the V winning determination is performed or the timing Ta5 when the discharge of the support ball ends (a predetermined different from the specific mode. The pattern does not return from the mode to the “MAX” mode (specific mode) (not the specific mode), whereas the effect pattern C is timing Ta4 when the V winning determination is made or timing Ta5 when the discharge of the support ball is finished. At time Ta6 when the display of the time gauge image Z4 is continued and the second opening is performed at the timing Ta3, the gauge changes from the remaining mode (a predetermined mode different from the specific mode) to the “MAX” mode of the timing Ta1 ( This is a pattern for returning to the specific mode) (specific mode).

  However, the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C are displayed at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends, and the time gauge image Z4 in a common mode in which the gauge is left is displayed, which causes the misalignment. In this case, the time gauge may return to the "MAX" mode at the timing Ta6 by continuously displaying the timing Ta5 at the maximum, that is, the second special winning opening 702B may be opened again. (Chance for V winning) is suggested. Therefore, if the player has not won a V prize in the first control, the player may carry out the second control at least until timing Ta5 even if the small hit types are small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9. Since it can be expected, the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and (B), in the effect patterns A to C, the form of the winning promotion effect image displayed from before the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B to the end of the opening period is as follows. As shown in FIG. 59 (B), although it is the promotion mode A composed of the arrow image Z1, the character images Z2, and Z3, in the effect pattern C, when the second special winning opening 702B in the first control is opened. When the V winning occurs, the mode of the winning promotion effect image displayed from before the second opening period of the second big winning opening 702B in the second control to the end of the opening period is as shown in FIG. 59 (C). In addition, the promotion mode B includes only the arrow image Z1A smaller than the arrow image Z1 (a mode different from the arrow image Z1). That is, when the V winning is generated by the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B, it is not necessary to aim for the V winning by the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B. Although it is not necessary to promote the winning of the game ball to the player in a conspicuous manner, since the prize ball can be obtained by winning the game ball, the arrow image Z1A in a less conspicuous manner than the arrow image Z1. Display only to inform that it is open.

  In the present embodiment, when the V winning occurs in the first control, the prize promotion effect image to be performed corresponding to the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B in the effect pattern C is generated in the effect pattern. It is displayed in a promotion mode B which is less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the prize promotion effect image which is performed corresponding to the first opening control of the second special winning opening 702B in C, that is, in the prize promotion effect corresponding to the second control. By restricting the execution, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful because the winning is promoted again despite the V winning.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the V winning occurs in the first control, as an example of limiting the execution of the winning promotion effect corresponding to the second control, the promotion mode B is made less conspicuous than the promotion mode A. Although (for example, the arrow image Z1 is made smaller or the character images Z2, Z3 are erased) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape and size of the arrow image Z1, the character images Z2, Z3 are illustrated. The promotion mode B may be made less conspicuous than the promotion mode A by changing the brightness, color, etc. without changing the brightness. Further, restricting the execution of the winning promotion effect corresponding to the second control does not only mean that the promotion mode B of the second control is less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the first control as described above. The visibility of the second control promotion mode B is more difficult than the first control promotion mode A, the second control promotion mode B is more difficult to specify than the first control promotion mode A, or the second control is supported. It includes not executing the winning promotion effect. In addition, when the V winning occurs in the first control, it is not necessary to limit the execution of the winning promotion effect corresponding to the second control. For example, the winning promotion effect corresponding to the second control corresponds to the first control. It may be performed in a manner substantially the same as the promotion mode A described above.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of the time gauge image Z4 is started in the winning promotion effect is set to the timing Ta1 slightly before the timing Ta2 at which the second special winning opening 702B is opened. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be the timing Ta2 at which the second special winning opening 702B is opened.

(Flow of production during small hit game state)
Next, the flow of effects during the small hitting game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62A to 62G are explanatory views showing the flow of each effect (in the case of the winning promotion effect pattern A) during the small hit game. 63A to 63G are explanatory views showing the flow of each effect (in the case of winning promotion effect patterns B and C) during the small hitting game. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect (in the case of the winning promotion effect pattern C) during the small hitting game, in which (A) to (D) and (A ') to (D').

  First, when a winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern A is performed in any of the small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and the small hits 7, 11, a small hit occurs as shown in FIG. 62 (A). When the small hitting game state is controlled, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 62B, shows the arrow image Z1 as a winning promotion effect image before the opening of the second special winning opening 702B. , And the display of the character images Z2 and Z3 and the time gauge image Z4 is started. As shown in FIG. 62C, during the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character images Z2 and Z3 is maintained and the gauge is gradually decreased in accordance with the remaining opening period. When the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased and the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 62D, when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is completed, the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 of the time gauge image Z4 are erased, and the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released. In some cases, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased, the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed, and the voices and sound effects such as “second storage ball release!” Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By turning on the game effect lamp 9 or the like, the player is informed that the support ball has been released.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), when the storage of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, the first storage release effect image Z6 is displayed, and the “first storage ball release!” Is made by the speakers 8L and 8R. The player is informed that the game ball has been emitted by outputting the following sound or sound effect, lighting the game effect lamp 9, or the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), when a V winning jackpot big hit occurs, the character image Z3 is deleted and a V winning jackpot big hit effect image Z7 for notifying that the V winning jackpot big hit has occurred is displayed. , V speaker jackpot effect A that informs the player that a V prize has occurred by outputting a voice or sound effect such as "V jackpot!" Or turning on the game effect lamp 9 through the speakers 8L and 8R. Start.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), when the V winning is not generated, the character image Z3 is erased and a lost effect image Z8 for notifying that the V winning is not generated is displayed. , The speaker 8L, 8R outputs a "sorry" voice or sound effect, turns on the game effect lamp 9, or the like to start a lost effect informing the player that the V winning jackpot has not occurred. ..

  Next, in the case where a winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern B or the effect pattern C is performed in any of the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8 and 12, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), When the small hit occurs and the small hit game state is controlled, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), before the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started, the winning promotion effect. The display of the arrow image Z1, the character images Z2 and Z3, and the time gauge image Z4 is started as images. As shown in FIG. 63 (C), during the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B, while the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character images Z2 and Z3 is maintained, the gauge is gradually decreased according to the remaining opening period. When the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased and the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (D), when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is finished, the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 are erased while the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge remains is displayed. , When the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed, and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice and a sound effect such as "second storage ball release!", And a game. By turning on the effect lamp 9 or the like, the player is informed that the support ball has been discharged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), when the storage of the first storage mechanism 204 is released while the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge remains is displayed, the first storage release effect image Z6 is displayed. The player is informed of the fact that the game ball has been emitted by outputting a voice and a sound effect such as "release the first stored ball!" Through the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9 and the like. To do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), when a V winning jackpot is generated, the time gauge image Z4 and the character image Z3 are deleted to notify that the V winning jackpot has been generated. By displaying Z7, outputting a sound or a sound effect "V big hit!" From the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, and the like, V which notifies the player that a V winning has occurred Start the winning jackpot production A.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), when the V winning is not generated, the character image Z3 is erased while the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge is left displayed, and the V winning is generated. By displaying the lost effect image Z8 for notifying that the player did not play it, outputting "sorry" voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turning on the game effect lamp 9, etc., the V winning jackpot. The loss effect is started to inform the player that no occurrence has occurred.

  Next, in the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern C, in the case where the V winning is not generated by the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B (miss), as shown in FIG. After displaying the time-gage image Z4 in a state where is left, the character image Z3 is erased, and the loss effect is displayed to display the loss effect image Z8 for notifying that the V winning has not occurred. , Before the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the arrow image Z1, the character images Z2, Z3, and the time gauge image Z4 are displayed as the winning promotion effect image. To start. Although not particularly shown, during the second opening period of the second special winning opening 702B, the display of the arrow image Z1, the character images Z2 and Z3 is maintained and the gauge is gradually decreased according to the remaining opening period. At the same time, when the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased and the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (C), when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is completed, the time gauge image Z4, the arrow image Z1, and the character image Z2 in which the gauge remains are erased, and the second storage is completed. When the storage of the mechanism 205 is released, the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed, and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound or a sound effect such as "second storage ball release!", And the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. The player is informed that the support ball has been released by turning on the light or the like. Next, when the storage of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, the first storage release effect image Z6 is displayed, and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound or a sound effect of "first storage ball release!" By turning on the game effect lamp 9 or the like, the player is informed that the game ball has been released.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), when a V-winning jackpot is generated, a V-winning jackpot effect image Z7A for notifying that the V-winning jackpot is generated is displayed, or "V By outputting a sound or a sound effect such as "big hit!" Or turning on the game effect lamp 9, the V winning big hit production B is started to notify the player that the V winning has occurred.

  In the V-winning jackpot production B, a V-winning jackpot production image Z7A having a different display mode (for example, different characters) from the V-winning jackpot production image Z7 of the V-winning jackpot production A is displayed. In this way, when a V prize is generated by opening the second special winning opening 702B in the first control, and when V is winning in the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control. By changing the display mode of the V winning jackpot effect image, when the second big winning opening 702B is opened, it is lost, but when the second big winning opening 702B is opened, V It is possible to more effectively notify that a prize has been won (that a V prize has been revived).

  In the present embodiment, when a V prize is generated by opening the second special winning opening 702B for the first time in the first control, and when opening the second special winning opening 702B for the second time in the second control. In the example, the character of the V-winning jackpot effect image is different from that when the V-winning occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode of the V-winning jackpot effect image (for example, , Color, shape, size, etc.). In addition, when a V prize is generated by opening the second special winning opening 702B in the first control, and when V is winning in the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control. You may use the V prize jackpot effect image of the form common to when doing.

  Further, although not particularly shown, when the V winning is not generated, a lost effect image Z8 for notifying that the V winning is not generated is displayed, and the sound and the effect of "sorry" are given by the speakers 8L and 8R. By outputting a sound, turning on the game effect lamp 9, or the like, a lost effect for informing the player that the V winning jackpot has not occurred is started.

  On the other hand, in the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern C, when the V winning occurs at the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B, as shown in FIG. 64 (A ′), the time gauge image Z4, the character image. Z3 is erased, a V-winning jackpot effect image Z7 for notifying that a V-winning has occurred is displayed, and a full rotation display of the effect design (see FIG. 64 (B ')) is performed. To start.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61B, in the case of small hits 8 and 12, the CPU 103 adopts the second pattern of performing the second control regardless of whether the first control is executed. In the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern C, when the V winning occurs at the first opening of the second special winning opening 702B, the V winning jackpot effect B is performed. Although it starts, since V winning does not occur even when the game ball enters the V winning opening 283 in the second opening control of the second winning opening 702B, the second opening control of the second winning opening 702B (second (1 control) to limit the execution of the winning a prize promotion effect, and produce in the V winning award jackpot effect B for a long period from the timing Ta4 when the V award winning jackpot effect B is started to the end of the second control (small hit game). Figure It continues to perform all rotation display of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production from being delayed until the second control ends from the timing when the V winning is generated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B '), before the second opening of the second special winning opening 702B is started, the display of the arrow image Z1A and the time gauge image Z4 as the winning promotion effect images is started. As shown in FIG. 64 (C ′), during the second opening period of the second special winning opening 702B, the display of the arrow image Z1A is maintained and the gauge is gradually decreased according to the remaining opening period. As shown in FIG. 64 (D '), when the opening of the second special winning opening 702B is completed, the time gauge image Z4 and the arrow image Z1A are erased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is performed in the small hitting game state, the time gauge image Z4 is displayed and the gauge corresponding to the remaining period of the opening period. It is possible to inform the player of the remaining period of the open period by reducing the display, but as described above, in the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8 and 12, the second in the first control. Since the special winning opening 702B is similarly opened once, it is difficult for the player to determine the small hit type until the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is started by the second control. Is.

  Then, in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12, at least the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is completed (closed). ) The time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge is left is displayed at the timing Ta3, so that the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B has not yet ended, that is, in the second control. Since it is suggested that the second big winning opening 702B may be opened for the second time, at least the second big winning opening 702B is opened (closed) even in the case of small wins 1, 3, 5, and 9. It can be expected that the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is performed until timing Ta3. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be appropriately maintained.

(First invention)
As described above, the present invention includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of giving a value advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on that a game ball that has entered a predetermined area has passed through a specific area, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-213200 It is possible to store a game medium guided to a specific path that can pass through a specific region among the game media that have entered a predetermined region, as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. , Another game medium that has entered the predetermined region is guided to a predetermined route, and the ratio of the game medium stored in the specific route passing through the specific region is changed by the other game medium guided to the predetermined route. there were. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there is a problem that the amusement lottery is insufficient because the winning / nothing lottery for determining whether or not the gaming medium guided to the particular route passes through the particular area is monotonous. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable means (for example, second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, open state) in which a game medium (for example, game ball P) can enter.
A variable control means capable of controlling the variable means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120 shown in FIG. 35);
Equipped with
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second special winning opening 702B),
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided,
It is possible to add an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific region, and the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific region differs depending on the number of game media that have passed through the predetermined region (for example, The opening pattern of the second special winning opening 702B is different depending on the type of small hit, so that the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different and the game balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205 are different. The number of P, that is, the number of support balls held by the missing ball holding units 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes according to this, etc.),
The variable control means,
A first pattern that performs a first control that allows a game medium to pass through the predetermined area, and a second pattern that performs a second control that allows the game medium to pass through the predetermined area again after performing the first control. The variable means can be controlled by any of a plurality of types of patterns including, (for example, the CPU 103, in the small hitting game state, small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and small hits 2, 4, 6). In the case of 10, small hits 7 and 11, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on the first pattern, and in the case of small hits 8 and 12, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is based on the second pattern. Portion for controlling the ball device 7B),
In the second pattern, the second control is performed regardless of whether or not the game medium that has passed the predetermined region by the first control has passed the specific region (for example, the CPU 103, in the second pattern, Whether the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning opening 283 in the first control or the game ball (game ball) does not enter the V winning opening 283 in the first control, that is, the V winning Portion that executes the second control regardless of whether or not occurs (see FIG. 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, not only the first control but also the variable means may be controlled by the second pattern in which the second control is performed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
Further, by executing the second control regardless of whether or not a V winning is generated in the first control, common storage mechanism control process data corresponding to all the small hit types is stored for the storage mechanism control. Can be used. Therefore, one storage mechanism control process data can be shared by all the small hits without having to prepare a plurality of storage mechanism control process data according to each small hit type, so that the data capacity is suitable. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 as well as to reduce the load.
In the present embodiment, the storage mechanism control uses the common storage mechanism control process data corresponding to all the small hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each storage mechanism control process data is not limited thereto. The control may be performed by using individual storage mechanism control process data according to the hit type.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The storage means (for example, the second storage mechanism 205) capable of storing the game medium (for example, the game ball P) that has passed through the predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B),
The ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening 283) is different depending on the number of the game media stored in the storing means (for example, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 702B according to the small hit type). The difference is that the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, the game balls P are held by the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E. The number of support balls varies, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the storage state of the game medium, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine described in means 2,
The variable control means performs the second control at a higher ratio when the number of game media stored in the storage means in the first control is smaller than when the number of game media stored in the storage means is larger. (For example, when the CPU 103 has a small number of support balls when performing the first control (one support ball) and is a small hit of 8 or 12, the number of support balls is large when performing the first control ( (3 or 5 support balls) Smaller hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and smaller hits 7 and 11 (a part that performs the second control at a higher rate (100% probability), etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the second control will be performed, even if the number of game media passing through the predetermined region in the first control is small.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Specific effects that can be executed in a plurality of different modes based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball P) has passed through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening 283). An execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) is provided,
The specific effect execution means specifies in a different mode when the game medium entered by the first control passes through the specific area and when the game medium entered by the second control passes through the specific area. Performing an effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 causes a V winning by opening the second special winning opening 702B in the first control, executes the V winning jackpot effect A and executes the second control. When the V winning occurs when the second big winning opening 702B is opened, the V winning jackpot effect B is executed (see FIGS. 64D and 64A ').
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
A promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that prompts the entry of the game medium into the variable means in correspondence with the first control and the second control (for example, the effect control CPU 120, during a small hit game, An operation (operation) of causing the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 702B in response to opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the first control and opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control A portion for executing a winning promotion effect for promoting the.
When the game medium entered by the first control in the second pattern passes through the specific area, the promotion effect executing unit limits execution of the promotion effect corresponding to the second control in the second pattern ( For example, when the production control CPU 120 generates a winning promotion production image corresponding to the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B in the production pattern C when the V winning occurs in the first control, the production pattern For example, a portion displayed in a promotion mode B which is less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the winning promotion effect image performed corresponding to the first opening control of the second special winning opening 702B in C. (see FIGS. 59 (B) and (C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the promotion effect is performed although the advantageous value is determined to be given.

(Second invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine in which a game medium flowing down a predetermined downflow route can enter the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-93541. In addition, there has been one in which the firing promotion is informed by reducing and updating the gauge display corresponding to each of the opening control period of the first variable winning device and the opening control period of the second variable winning device. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a problem that the interest of the effect of performing the display corresponding to the opening control period (predetermined period) is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
An advantageous effect corresponding to a content advantageous to the player (for example, V winning big hit effect / big hit confirmation notification effect of modification 1) is given for a predetermined period (for example, opening period of the second big winning opening 702B / push of modification 1). A predetermined effect that can be executed after the elapse of the operation valid period of the button 31B) and that includes an updating operation of a predetermined display (for example, the time gauge image Z4 / the time gauge image Z34 of the modified example 1) corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period. (For example, the CPU120 for effect control) is provided, which is capable of executing (for example, a winning promotion effect / button operation effect of the modified example 1).
The effect execution means,
A first pattern (for example, the production pattern B / the production patterns PT-2 and PT-4 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is not the specific aspect after the elapse of the predetermined period, and the predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period. A second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 of modification 1) having a display mode of a predetermined display as a specific mode in response to the new setting of It is possible to execute a predetermined effect with any of a plurality of types of patterns including,
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is suggested that the predetermined period is newly set by making the display mode of the predetermined display common when the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, In the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12, at least the opening control of the second big winning opening 702B. At the timing Ta3 when is ended (closed), the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge is left is displayed, so that the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is performed in the second control. 59 to 61, in the first modification, the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, P. -6 means that the display of the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode in which the gauge remains is continued at least from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 at which the operation valid period ends, so that the operation valid period is continued. Part where it is suggested that may be set once again (see FIGS. 66 to 68).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player expects that the predetermined period is newly set, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.
Specifically, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined display is displayed in a common manner in both the first pattern and the second pattern, so that the player can display the predetermined display even in the case of the first pattern. Since it can be expected that the time period will be changed and the predetermined period will be newly set, the motivation for playing the game can be maintained.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The game medium (for example, the game ball P) is provided with variable means (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, open state),
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second special winning opening 702B),
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided,
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, when the V winning ball holding unit 272 rotates and reaches a position corresponding to the V winning port 283, the game is played). The ball P1 enters the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B to generate a V winning),
The predetermined period is a period corresponding to a period during which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state (for example, a period during which the second special winning opening 702B is opened).
According to this feature, the player expects that the variable means is newly controlled to be in the enterable state, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In any of the first pattern and the second pattern, the effect performing means can set the display mode of the predetermined display at the time when the predetermined period has elapsed to a display mode in which the predetermined period remains. Some (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C, the time gauge in a common mode in which the gauge remains at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends. 63. A portion displaying image Z4. In FIG. 63 / modified example 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs at least the first time even when the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 in which the second operation effective period is not set are executed. At the timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period ends, the time gauge image Z34 shows the effect pattern PT-3, T-5, the portion displaying in a common manner and time gauge image Z34 in PT-6. FIG. 67 (B) refer)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player expects that the predetermined display will return to the previous mode, the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by displaying the predetermined display in such a manner that the predetermined period remains, it is possible to make it appear as if the predetermined period has not elapsed, so that the new predetermined period is set. It is possible to suitably improve the sense of expectation.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means is capable of executing an operation promoting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120, during the small hit game, the second big winning opening in the first control. In response to the opening of 702B and the opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control, a winning promotion effect for promoting the operation (action) of causing the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 702B is executed. 59. A portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the button operation effect for urging the player to operate the push button 31B in accordance with the operation valid period of the push button 31B in the reference / variant 1 of FIG. reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined period is a motion detection period in which the player's motion can be detected (for example, the operation valid period of the push button 31B in Modification 1),
The motion detection period can be set a plurality of times within a specific period (for example, a variable display period) (for example, in the modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation valid period twice in the button operation effect). (A part capable of executing the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player expects that the predetermined display will return to the previous mode, the interest can be improved.

A gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect execution means,
In the first pattern and the second pattern, the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C, the second special winning opening 702B. From the timing Ta3 when the opening control of No. is ended (closed) to the timing Ta4 when the V winning determination is performed, in the part / variant example 1 in which the display of the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge is left, is continued, In the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the CPU 120 for use has a gauge remaining from timing Ta4 to timing Ta5 at which the first operation valid period ends. (The portion that continues to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode such as
The predetermined effect can be executed in a third pattern in which the predetermined display is erased at the time when the predetermined period has elapsed or before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern A, the second special winning opening). A portion for deleting the time gauge image Z4 at the timing Ta3 when the opening control of 702B is completed (closed) .Refer to Fig. 60 and Fig. 61 / In Modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 makes the first effect in the effect pattern PT-1. A portion for erasing the time gauge image Z34 at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period ends (see FIG. 68).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display will continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 7 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The effect execution means continues to display the predetermined display even after the predetermined period has elapsed regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern (for example, a new predetermined display after the predetermined period has elapsed). In the effect pattern A in which the period is not set and the effect pattern PT-1 in the modified example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is performed even after the predetermined period has elapsed. The part that is displayed continuously.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display will continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine in which a game medium flowing down a predetermined downflow route can enter the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-93541. In addition, there has been one in which the firing promotion is informed by reducing and updating the gauge display corresponding to each of the opening control period of the first variable winning device and the opening control period of the second variable winning device. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a problem that the interest of the effect of performing the display corresponding to the opening control period (predetermined period) is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
An advantageous effect corresponding to a content advantageous to the player (for example, V winning big hit effect / big hit confirmation notification effect of modification 1) is given for a predetermined period (for example, opening period of the second big winning opening 702B / push of modification 1). A predetermined effect that can be executed after the elapse of the operation valid period of the button 31B) and that includes an updating operation of a predetermined display (for example, the time gauge image Z4 / the time gauge image Z34 of the modified example 1) corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period. (For example, the CPU120 for effect control) is provided, which is capable of executing (for example, a winning promotion effect / button operation effect of the modified example 1).
The effect execution means,
A first pattern (for example, the production pattern B / the production patterns PT-2 and PT-4 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is not the specific aspect after the elapse of the predetermined period, and the predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period. A second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 of modification 1) having a display mode of a predetermined display as a specific mode in response to the new setting of It is possible to execute a predetermined effect with any of a plurality of types of patterns including,
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is suggested that the predetermined period is newly set by making the display mode of the predetermined display common when the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, In the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12, at least the opening control of the second big winning opening 702B. At the timing Ta3 when is ended (closed), the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge is left is displayed, so that the second opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is performed in the second control. 59 to 61, in the first modification, the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT. 6 means that the display of the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode in which the gauge is left is continued at least from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 at which the operation valid period ends so that the operation valid period is A portion that may be set once again (see FIGS. 66 to 68),
It is possible to execute a motion promotion effect that urges the player's operation corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 opens the second special winning opening 702B and the second in the first control during the small hit game). In the part / variant 1 that executes a prize promotion effect that promotes an operation (action) of causing a player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 702B in response to opening of the second special winning opening 702B in control. (A portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a button operation effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B according to the operation valid period of the push button 31B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player expects that the predetermined period is newly set, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The game medium (for example, the game ball P) is provided with variable means (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, open state),
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second special winning opening 702B),
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided,
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, when the V winning ball holding unit 272 rotates and reaches a position corresponding to the V winning port 283, the game is played). The ball P1 enters the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B to generate a V winning),
The predetermined period is a period corresponding to a period during which the variable means is controlled to the enterable state (for example, a period during which the second special winning opening 702B is opened).
According to this feature, the player expects that the variable means is newly controlled to be in the enterable state, so that the interest can be improved.

A gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In any of the first pattern and the second pattern, the effect performing means can set the display mode of the predetermined display at the time when the predetermined period has elapsed to a display mode in which the predetermined period remains. Some (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C, the time gauge in a common mode in which the gauge remains at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends. 63. A portion displaying image Z4. In FIG. 63 / modified example 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs at least the first time even when the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 in which the second operation effective period is not set are executed. At the timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period ends, the time gauge image Z34 shows the effect pattern PT-3, T-5, the portion displaying in a common manner and time gauge image Z34 in PT-6. FIG. 67 (B) refer)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player expects that the predetermined display will return to the previous mode, the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by displaying the predetermined display in such a manner that the predetermined period remains, it is possible to make it appear as if the predetermined period has not elapsed, so that the new predetermined period is set. It is possible to suitably improve the sense of expectation.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means is capable of executing an operation promoting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120, during the small hit game, the second big winning opening in the first control. In response to the opening of 702B and the opening of the second special winning opening 702B in the second control, a winning promotion effect for promoting the operation (action) of causing the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 702B is executed. In Part / Modified Example 1, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a button operation effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in accordance with the operation valid period of the push button 31B.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined period is a motion detection period in which the player's motion can be detected (for example, the operation valid period of the push button 31B in Modification 1),
The motion detection period can be set a plurality of times within a specific period (for example, a variable display period) (for example, in the modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation valid period twice in the button operation effect). (A part capable of executing the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player expects that the predetermined display will return to the previous mode, the interest can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect execution means,
In the first pattern and the second pattern, the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C, the second special winning opening 702B. From the timing Ta3 when the opening control of No. is ended (closed) to the timing Ta4 when the V winning determination is performed, in the part / variant example 1 in which the display of the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge is left, is continued, In the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the CPU 120 for use has a gauge remaining from timing Ta4 to timing Ta5 at which the first operation valid period ends. (The portion that continues to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode such as
The predetermined effect can be executed in a third pattern in which the predetermined display is erased at the time when the predetermined period has elapsed or before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect pattern A, the second special winning opening). A portion for deleting the time gauge image Z4 at the timing Ta3 when the opening control of 702B is completed (closed) .Refer to Fig. 60 and Fig. 61 / In Modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 makes the first effect in the effect pattern PT-1. A portion for erasing the time gauge image Z34 at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period ends (see FIG. 68).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display will continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

A gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The effect execution means continues to display the predetermined display even after the predetermined period has elapsed regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern (for example, a new predetermined display after the predetermined period has elapsed). In the effect pattern A in which the period is not set and the effect pattern PT-1 in the modified example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is performed even after the predetermined period has elapsed. The part that is displayed continuously.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display will continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

(4th invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following fourth invention. That is, in the past, in a gaming machine capable of giving a value advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the fact that a game ball that has entered a predetermined area has entered a specific area, for example, JP-A-2018-480. Such as those described in Japanese Patent Publication, etc., having a predetermined member that sorts a game ball that has entered a predetermined region into a specific region and outside the specific region, and that can store one game ball by the predetermined member, As described in JP-A-2005-177858 or the like, it has a predetermined member capable of storing a game ball that has entered into a predetermined area, and the following ball is stored in the state where one game ball is stored by the predetermined member. Some were able to be discharged outside the specified area. The gaming machine described in the above patent publication has a problem that it is not possible to increase the degree of attention to the stored state of the game balls that have entered the predetermined area. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the storage state of the game medium,
The gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine) capable of giving a value (for example, a big hit) advantageous to a player based on that a game medium (for example, a game ball P) has entered a specific region (for example, a V winning opening 283). 1) and
The ratio to which the advantageous value is given changes depending on the number of game media stored by the storage means capable of storing the game media (for example, the second storage mechanism 205) (for example, depending on the small hit type). Since the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 702B is different, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, the misalignment. The number of support balls held by the ball holding units 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly).
The storage means has a predetermined member (for example, a distribution member 242) that can be changed into a plurality of modes, and the number of game media stored varies depending on the mode of the predetermined member (for example, the second storage mechanism 205). Has a distribution member 242 capable of changing between a first rotation state and a second rotation state, and is stored depending on whether the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state or the second rotation state. The number of game balls P to be changed is changed (see FIGS. 9 and 10).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the storage state of the game medium by paying attention to the aspect of the predetermined member.
Specifically, depending on whether the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state or the second rotation state when the game ball P that has entered the second special winning opening 702B reaches the second storage mechanism 205, Since the number of stored game balls P changes, the state of the distribution member 242 can be focused on.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
It is possible to store a predetermined number of game media (for example, two game balls) when the predetermined member (for example, the distribution member 242) is in the first mode (for example, the first rotation state),
When the predetermined member is the second mode different from the first mode, it is possible to store a smaller number of game media (for example, one game ball) than the predetermined number,
When the predetermined member stores the game medium in the second mode, the subsequent game medium is guided to the discharge area (for example, the discharge path 210) (see FIG. 9B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of stored game media can be changed with a simple configuration.
Specifically, the number of stored game balls P can be changed only by rotating the distribution member 242 between the first rotation state and the second rotation state, so that the structure can be prevented from becoming complicated.

A gaming machine according to means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
By changing the mode of the predetermined member (for example, the distribution member 242), the stored game medium is guided to a predetermined path (for example, by changing the distribution member 242 to the second rotation state). , The game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C and flows down to the third guide path 203B through the inflow port 203C. See FIG. 9 (C).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stored game medium can be released with a simple configuration.
Specifically, the distribution member 242 is rotated from the first rotation state to the second rotation state without changing the first rotation state or the third rotation state different from the second rotation state. Since the game ball P can be guided to the rotating body 208 by using the operation, the structure can be prevented from becoming complicated.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a small hit) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a game medium (for example, a game ball P) can enter a predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B). Equipped with a variable member (for example, a second special winning opening door 702A) that changes to an enterable state
The operation mode of the variable member is different when the first specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and when the second specific display result different from the first specific display result is derived and displayed ( For example, the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 supply the support balls to the rotary body 208 at most one by opening the second big winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern A in the small hit game state. In addition, the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10 have the largest number of support balls in the rotary body 208 by opening the second special winning opening 702B twice based on the opening pattern B in the small hitting game state. In the small hitting game state, the second special winning opening 702B is opened three times based on the opening pattern C, and the support balls are the largest in the rotating body 208. In 5 Can be supplied.),
The storage means is capable of storing the game medium that has entered the predetermined area,
The operation mode of the predetermined member is different when the first specific display result is derived and displayed and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the small hit type is any of small hits 1 to 10). Even though, the distribution member 242 always operates based on a predetermined operation pattern, while the opening patterns A to C of the second special winning opening 702B are different depending on the type of small hit, the operation of the distribution member 242. Since the opening timing and the number of times of opening for the pattern are changed, the operation mode of the distribution member 242 when the game ball P reaches the second storage mechanism 205 (in the first rotation state and the second rotation state) depending on the small hit type. Which is different) (see FIGS. 50 to 52).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operation modes of the variable member and the predetermined member are different according to the variable display result, monotonousness of the game can be avoided, and interest can be improved.
Specifically, the timing at which the game ball P enters the second special winning opening 702B changes depending on the small hit type, and when the game ball P reaches the second storage mechanism 205, the distribution member 242 makes the first time. Since it is difficult to predict whether the game ball is in the dynamic state or the second rotation state, it is possible not only to avoid the monotonous game, but also to pay attention to the situation where the game ball P is stored.

A gaming machine of means 5 of a fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Based on the fact that a specific display result (for example, a small hit) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a game medium (for example, a game ball P) can enter a predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B). A variable member (for example, a second special winning opening door 702A) that changes to an enterable state,
Production execution means capable of executing suggestive production that suggests that the game medium enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening 283);
Equipped with
The game medium enters the specific area when the first specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result and when the second specific display result different from the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The ratio is different (for example, the larger the number of game balls P (support balls) guided to the rotating body 208 after being stored in the second storage unit 247, the more the game balls P are blocked, and the loss ball holding units 273A to 273E are blocked. Since the number is large and the V winning rate is high, a maximum of 5 support balls can be guided to the rotating body 208, a small hit 7, 11 and a maximum of 3 support balls can be guided to the rotating body 208. Probability of becoming a big hit by V winning in the order of 2, 4, 6, 10 per hit, and a maximum of one support ball guided by the rotating body 208 in the order of small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 (player's advantage) 46.),
The effect execution means can execute different types of suggested effects depending on which of the first specific display result and the second specific display result the variable display result is (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 stops and displays the small hit pattern M having a different background color according to which of the small hit types 1 to 10 corresponds to the small hit display result as the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. , A portion capable of executing a V winning suggestion effect indicating that the game ball P enters the V winning opening 283, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest can be improved in that the player pays attention to the mode of suggestive production.
Specifically, since the number of stored balls is suggested before the game balls P enter the second special winning opening 702B, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a large number of support balls are guided to the rotating body 208. it can.

(Fifth invention)
Further, the fifth embodiment shown below is included in the present embodiment. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of giving a value advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) based on the fact that a game ball that has entered a predetermined area has entered a specific area, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-213200 As described in the publication, etc., the specific area is rotating and moving at a constant speed, and the game balls that have entered the predetermined area are stored, and there is a certain period of time after the game ball enters the predetermined area. There was a game ball that could flow into a specific area by releasing the storage when it passed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, since the rotation speed and the storage release timing of the specific area are constant, countermeasures against misconduct such as flowing down the game ball aiming at a timing when the specific area can be entered are insufficient. There was a problem. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraud, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine) capable of giving a value (for example, a big hit) advantageous to a player based on that a game medium (for example, a game ball P) has entered a specific region (for example, a V winning opening 283). 1) and
A game medium that has entered a predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B) can move to the specific area by passing through a specific path (for example, the second guidance paths 202A and 202B),
A blocking unit (for example, a second unit) provided on the specific path for blocking the movement of the non-spherical object (for example, the object X) while allowing the movement of the spherical game medium (for example, the proper game ball P). Bottom surface 212B) (see FIG. 7A and FIG. 49).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress fraud.

A gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The specific route (for example, the second guide route 202A, 202B) has a storage unit (for example, the first storage unit 227) capable of storing the game medium (for example, the game ball P),
The inhibition portion is configured by a bottom surface (for example, the second bottom surface 212B) of the storage portion in the forming member that forms the specific path,
The bottom surface of the storage portion has a smaller inclination angle than the area other than the storage portion on the bottom surface of the forming member (for example, the downward inclination angle θ2 of the second bottom surface 212B corresponding to the first storage portion 227 is the second guide). It is smaller than the descending inclination angles θ1, θ3, θ4 of the other bottom surfaces (first bottom surface 212A, third bottom surface 212C, fourth bottom surface 212D) in the path 202A (θ2 <θ1, θ3, θ4).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably suppress fraud with a simple configuration.
Specifically, by merely changing the downflow angle of the second bottom surface 212B of the second guiding path 202A in the first storage part 227, the downflow of the object X can be obstructed or the downflow timing can be deviated. Since it is not necessary to provide any member or drive source, it is possible to avoid complication of the structure.

A gaming machine according to means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
An inclination angle in a region closer to the specific region than the inhibition portion (for example, the second bottom face 212B) on the bottom surface of the forming member that forms the specific route (for example, the second guiding route 202A, 202B) is larger than the other regions. Has a large predetermined area (for example, the third bottom surface 212C) (for example, the downward inclination angle θ3 of the third bottom surface 212C continuously provided on the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B is the fourth bottom surface on the downstream side). It is larger than the downward inclination angle θ4 of 212D (θ3> θ4).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress fraud by making the passing speed of the game medium uniform.
Specifically, the third bottom surface 212C can accelerate the object X that is difficult to flow down, which makes it difficult to reduce the flow-down speed and aim for the V winning. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suppress misconduct. ..

A gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The specific route (for example, the second guide route 202A, 202B) has a storage unit (for example, the first storage unit 227) capable of storing the game medium (for example, the game ball P),
The game medium stored in the storage section guides the subsequent game medium that has entered the predetermined area to a special route (for example, the third guide route 203A, 203B) (see FIG. 7A),
Depending on the game medium guided to the special route, the ratio of the game medium stored in the storage portion entering the specific area changes (for example, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 702B depending on the type of small hit). Due to the difference, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 after being guided to the third guide paths 203A and 203B, that is, , The number of support balls held by the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) is changed accordingly.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the game medium guided to the special route and improve the interest.
Specifically, since the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes depending on the number of support balls held in the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E, not only the winning balls stored in the first storage unit 227 but also the support balls flow down. Since interest in storage and storage can also be paid attention to, interest can be improved appropriately.

(Sixth invention)
Further, the sixth invention shown below is included in the present embodiment. That is, in a conventional gaming machine provided with an operable movable body, the first drive mechanism rotates from the first position to the second position as described in, for example, JP-A-2017-17098. At the same time, there is a device including a movable body that slides at a second position by a second drive mechanism including a plurality of gear members including a rack and a pinion. The gaming machine described in the above patent publication has a problem that the structure of the second drive mechanism is complicated and the number of parts increases, resulting in an increase in manufacturing cost. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing the manufacturing cost, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
An operable movable body (for example, the production movable body 500),
An operating mechanism (for example, operating mechanism 501) for operating the movable body,
Equipped with
The movable body is capable of performing a first motion and a second motion different from the first motion (for example, in the production movable body 500, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is rotated by the production body motor 520. After performing the first operation of descending while rotating from the production body origin position to the production body advancing position, by further rotating the rotating body 521, the connecting shaft 530 causes the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526. And the first link member 526 rotates, whereby the second link member 527 slides with respect to the second arm portion 523B, and the second acting portion 539 functions as the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R. It is possible to perform a second operation in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R rotate in the direction away from the decorative portion 511B.),
The operating mechanism is
A first member (for example, a first arm member 523) for supporting the movable body and changing the mode of the movable body to perform the first operation;
A second member (for example, a second link member 527, a slide portion 538) that is displaceable along the first member and that allows the movable body to perform the second operation by being displaced with respect to the first member. When,
(See FIGS. 22 to 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of operations of the movable body can be realized with a simple configuration using the second member, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
Specifically, since the first arm member 523 for performing the first operation can be used to guide the second link member 527 for performing the second operation in a displaceable manner, the number of parts of the operation mechanism increases. It is possible to prevent the structure from becoming complicated.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The first member (for example, the first arm member 523) is a guide portion (for example, guide walls 535A and 535B) for guiding the displacement of the second member (for example, the second link member 527 and the slide portion 538). Having guide shafts 534A, 534B),
The second member is arranged coaxially with the first member (for example, the second link member 527 is arranged so as to be movable coaxially with the second arm portion 523B. See FIG. 18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the operating mechanism can be downsized and the space efficiency can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The operation mechanism (for example, the operation mechanism 501) is
A drive unit (for example, a performance body motor 520),
A rotating body (for example, a rotating body 521) that is rotated by the driving unit,
Have
The movable body can perform the first motion and the second motion by the rotation of the rotating body (for example, in the effecting movable body 500, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is rotated by the effecting body motor 520. Therefore, after performing the first operation of descending while rotating from the production body origin position to the production body advancing position, by further rotating the rotating body 521, the connecting shaft 530 performs the first action of the first link member 526. The first link member 526 is rotated by acting on the portion 537, whereby the second link member 527 slides with respect to the second arm portion 523B, and the second acting portion 539 functions as the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R. Thus, it is possible to perform the second operation in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R rotate in the direction away from the decorative portion 511B (see FIGS. 22 to 25).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first operation and the second operation of the movable body can be realized by the common drive means.

A gaming machine according to means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The second member (for example, the second link member 527) is provided with a protrusion (for example, the second acting portion 539),
The second member can be displaced by engaging the protrusion and a part of the movable body (for example, the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R) (for example, the second link member 527 is in the first slide position). To the second slide position, the second action portion 539 presses the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R, which causes the decoration portion 512R to rotate clockwise in the front view about the rotation shaft 510. At the same time, since the decoration portion 512L rotates counterclockwise in the front view about the rotation shaft 510, the projecting pieces of the decoration portions 512L and 512R change to the second decoration state in which the decoration pieces 512L and 512R are separated from the decoration portion 511B. (See 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the driving force can be transmitted to the movable body by displacing the second member with a simple configuration.

A gaming machine according to means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 4,
The movable body (for example, the production movable body 500) includes a first movable portion (for example, a first movable portion 511) and a second movable portion (for example, a second movable portion 512) operable with respect to the first movable portion. With decorative parts 512L, 512R),
The second movable portion operates with respect to the first movable portion by the displacement of the second member (for example, when the second link member 527 moves from the first slide position to the second slide position, The second acting portion 539 presses the interlocking shaft 517 of the decoration portion 512R, whereby the decoration portion 512R rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 510 in a front view, and the decoration portion 512L rotates around the rotation shaft 510. As a result, the projection pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R change to a second decorative state in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R are separated from the decorative portion 511B (see FIGS. 23 and 25).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the driving force generated by the rotation of the rotating body can be transmitted to the second movable portion via the second member, and the second movable portion can be operated with a simple configuration.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention is applicable even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modification of the second invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a diagram showing display contents output when a button operation is detected or when an operation valid period ends, FIG. 66B shows a button operation effect pattern determination table, and FIG. 66C shows a time gauge display mode. FIG. FIG. 67A to FIG. 67F are diagrams showing a production operation example of a button operation production. 68A is a timing chart showing an operation example of a time gauge display mode in the effect pattern PT-1, and FIG. 68B is an operation example of a time gauge display mode in an effect pattern PT-2, PT-4. (C) is a timing chart showing the operation example of the display mode of the time gauge in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6.

  In the embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the V winning jackpot jackpot effect (advantageous effect) corresponding to the content advantageous to the player after the opening period (predetermined period) of the second special winning opening 702B has elapsed. At the same time, the form in which the winning promotion effect (predetermined effect) including the update operation of the time gauge image Z4 (predetermined display) corresponding to the remaining period of the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B can be executed is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a jackpot confirmation notification effect (advantageous effect) for notifying that a big hit will be given as an advantageous effect corresponding to the content (big hit) advantageous to the player, the operation effective period of the push button 31B ( It can be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period), and the time gauge image (place May be performed a button operation effect including updating operation of the display) (given effect).

  In this modified example 1, as a variation pattern of the special symbol, there are a non-reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern, and a super reach variation pattern, and the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the effect symbol according to each variation pattern. Is. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the effect symbols was started, the super reach effect is started and there is a possibility of a big hit while the super reach effect is being executed. It is possible to execute a button operation effect as a suggestion effect that suggests.

  The button operation effect urges the player to operate the push button 31B in accordance with the operation effective period, and operates the push button 31B (press operation by the player) within the operation effective period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effectively accepted. When detected, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without detecting the operation of the push button 31B (press operation by the player), the image display device 5 displays "CHANGE!" There is a possibility of a big hit by displaying the character image Z32 "Heat! (Not shown)" and outputting the sound of "CHANCE!", "Geki heat!", "Super heat!" From the speakers 8L and 8R. It is a production that suggests.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the effect control CPU 120 can execute the button operation effect based on any one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6, and the effect pattern PT-. 1, PT-2, PT-4 are patterns in which the operation valid period of the push button 31B is set once within a specific period (for example, a variable display period of effect symbols), and effect patterns PT-3, PT. -5 and PT-6 have a pattern in which the operation valid period of the push button 31B is set once within the specific period and then newly set once (two times in total).

  When the variation pattern of the special symbol is the super reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 uses the button operation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 (B) when starting the variable display of the effect symbol, and produces the effect pattern. It is determined based on which of PT-1 to PT-6 the button operation effect is executed. Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern PT-1 is 10%, the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-3 are 15%, and the effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5 are 25%. , 10% of the effect pattern PT-6 is determined, and if the variable display result is SP reach loss (super reach loss), the effect pattern PT-1 is 40%, and the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-3. 25%, 5% of the effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5, and 0% of the effect pattern PT-6. That is, the effect patterns PT-1, PT-2 and PT-3, PT-4 and PT-5, and PT-6 are set in order of increasing jackpot expectation. In addition, the effect pattern PT-6 is a pattern in which a big hit is determined if it appears.

  In addition, in the present modification 1, the mode in which the button operation effect is executed based on any of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6 with a probability of 100% in the super reach change pattern is exemplified. At this time, whether or not to execute the button operation effect is determined by lottery, and when the execution is determined, it is determined based on which of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6 the button operation effect is executed. You can Also, the button operation effect may be executable even in a variation pattern other than the super reach variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the effect display variable display mode is the SP reach mode, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display area of the image display device 5 to display a button image for prompting the operation of the push button 31B. Z30 and the character image Z31 of “Press!” Are displayed to start the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and the time gauge corresponding to the remaining period of the operation valid period of the push button 31B is updated. The operating time gauge image Z34 is displayed, and the button operation effect is started.

  In the effect pattern PT-1, as shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 68 (A), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta1 when the variable display of effect symbols is started, and the mode of variable display of effect symbols is changed. At a timing Ta3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta2 when the SP reach mode is set, the time gauge image Z34 in the state where the gauge is MAX is displayed (see FIG. 67 (A)), and the operation valid period of the push button 31B starts. From the set timing Ta3, the gauge gradually decreases in accordance with the remaining period of the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period ends, the gauge becomes "0", that is, the timing Ta4 at which the remaining period becomes "0". Alternatively, the time gauge image Z34 is deleted at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (see FIG. 67 (C)).

  Further, in the present modification example 1, in the effect pattern PT-1, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period and the character image Z32 of "CHANGE!" Is displayed, the time gauge image Z34 is deleted. Although the form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be continued until the operation valid period elapses, and may be erased at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period elapses.

  As for production patterns PT-2 and PT-4, as shown in FIG. 66 (A) and FIG. 68 (B), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta1 when the variable display of production symbols is started, and the production symbols are changed. At a timing Ta3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta2 when the display mode becomes the SP reach mode, the time gauge image Z34 in the state where the gauge is MAX is displayed (see FIG. 67A), and the push button 31B is operated. From the timing Ta3 when the effective period starts, the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the operation effective period, and at the timing Ta4 when the operation effective period ends, the gauge is larger than "0" and is larger than "MAX". The time gauge image Z34 continues to be displayed until the timing Ta5 in a mode that the number is small, that is, the remaining period remains, and "press!" Character image Z31 is displayed in a manner inconspicuous inverted (see FIG. 67 (B)).

  In addition, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, the character image Z32 of "CHANCE!" Is displayed in the case of the effect pattern PT-2, and "Super heat!" Is displayed in the case of the effect pattern PT-4. However, the gauge gradually decreases. Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the time gauge image Z34 is erased at timing Ta5 at which a predetermined time has elapsed from timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period has elapsed (see FIG. 67 (E)).

  In the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) and 68 (C), a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta1 when the variable display of effect symbols is started, At the timing Ta3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta2 when the variable display mode of the effect design is the SP reach mode, the time gauge image Z34 in the state where the gauge is MAX is displayed (see FIG. 67 (A)) and pushed. From the timing Ta3 at which the operation valid period of the button 31B is started, the gauge gradually decreases in accordance with the remaining period of the operation valid period, and at the timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period ends, the gauge is larger than "0". Less than “MAX”, that is, the display of the time gauge image Z34 is maintained until the timing Ta5 in a mode in which the remaining period remains, and Character image Z31 of the press! "Is displayed in a manner that does not stand out inverted (see FIG. 67 (B)).

  In addition, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, the characters "CHANCE!" In the case of the effect pattern PT-3 and the characters "Intense heat!" In the case of the effect patterns PT-5 and PT-6. The image Z32 is displayed, but the gauge gradually decreases. Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), at a timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has elapsed from a timing Ta4 when the operation valid period has elapsed, a display of a time gauge image Z34 in a mode in which the gauge returns from the remaining mode to “MAX”. Is changed to (see FIG. 67 (D)).

  Then, at timing Ta5, the second operation valid period is newly set, and the gauge gradually decreases from timing Ta5 when the second operation valid period is started according to the remaining period of the second operation valid period. The time gauge image Z34 is deleted after the gauge becomes "0", that is, the remaining period becomes "0" at the timing Ta6 when the second operation valid period ends (see FIG. 67 (F)). ).

  In addition, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the second operation valid period, “exciting heat” is generated in the case of the effect patterns PT-3 and PT-5, and “super heat” is generated in the effect pattern PT-6. The character image Z32 of "Heat! (Not shown)" is displayed, but the gauge gradually decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (B), in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4, the time gauge image Z34 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period ends. While the character image Z31 of "press!" Is displayed in an inverted and inconspicuous manner when is maintained, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the character image Z31. Alternatively, instead of the character image Z31, an image indicating that the operation of the push button 31B is in a standby state (for example, a character image of “wait”) may be displayed.

  Here, in the effect patterns PT-1, PT-2, PT-4, the operation valid period of the push button 31B is set only once, and in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the push button 31B is set. The operation valid period of is set twice in total. Then, in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 in which the operation valid period is set only once, the time gauge image Z34 is deleted at the timing Ta5 when the predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the gauge is The operation valid period is set twice, while the pattern is such that the mode that does not remain (a specific mode different from the specific mode) does not return to the “MAX” mode (specific mode) (not the specific mode). In the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, the timing gauge image Z34 is continuously displayed until a predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the timing when the second operation valid period starts. At Ta5, the mode in which the gauge remains (predetermined mode different from the specific mode) returns to the “MAX” mode (specific mode) (specific mode) Do not like) is a pattern.

  However, for the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the gauge remains at least from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 at which the first operation valid period ends. The display of the time gauge image Z34 in the common mode (predetermined mode) as described above is continued. That is, in the case of the effect pattern PT-1, the display of the time gauge image Z34 is continued at the timing Ta4 at which the display of the time gauge image Z34 ends, and thus the operation valid period may be set once again. That is, it is suggested that the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 having a high jackpot expectation degree may be executed.

  Therefore, even when the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 in which the second operation effective period is not set are executed, at least at the timing Ta4 when the first operation effective period ends, the time gauge image Z34 shows the effect pattern. By being displayed in the same manner as the time gauge image Z34 in PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, the player's expectation for setting the second operation effective period can be maintained. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Further, from the timing Ta4 when the first operation valid period ends to the timing Ta5 when the second operation valid period starts, the display of the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode in which the gauge remains is continued. Therefore, it is possible to further maintain the player's expectation that the second operation valid period is set.

  In the first modification, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the first or second operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, " The characters and voices such as "CHANCE!", "Geki heat!", "Super heat!" Are output, but different characters (for example, "BIG CHANCE!" Or "Hot?") Or characters, etc. It may be possible to display an effect image or the like according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, or to make a light-emitting body (for example, a game effect lamp 9 (LED) or the like) emit light in a predetermined mode, or a movable body for effect (for example, The effect movable body 500) may be operated in a predetermined operation mode (movement, rotation, etc.).

  Further, in the present modification 1, in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4, the timing Ta5 at which the second operation effective period starts after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta4 at which the operation effective period has elapsed, that is, the effect In the patterns PT-2 and PT-4, the form in which the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta5 when the second operation effective period is started has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation effective is effective. The time gauge image Z34 may be deleted between the timing Ta4 when the period has elapsed and the timing Ta5 when the predetermined time has passed (between Ta4 and Ta5).

  In addition, since the button operation effect in the first modification is a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit, the operation valid period is detected when the operation of the push button 31B is detected or when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. When “CANCEL!”, “Intense heat!”, And “Super-intense heat!” Are output when the time elapses, a form that suggests the possibility of a big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected or when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the effect image in a mode according to the expectation degree of the big hit. (For example, a cut-in image, a character image, a serif image, etc.) may be displayed.

  Alternatively, when the button operation effect is executed in the pre-reading notice, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected, or when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the pending storage display being displayed The mode may be changed to a specific mode.

(Modification 2)
Next, a modified example 2 of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 69. 69A is a diagram showing a push button mode change pattern in the second modification, FIG. 69B is a diagram showing a normal button, FIG. 69C is a diagram showing a large button, and FIG. 69D is a rainbow button. It is a figure.

  In Modification 1, regardless of which of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6 is determined as the effect pattern of the button operation effect, the button image Z30 displayed during the operation effective period is shown in FIG. 69 (B). As described above, the button image Z30 (normal button) in the normal mode imitating the push button 31B is used. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 69C, the button image Z30A in the mode larger than the button image Z30 in the normal mode. 69D, a button image in a plurality of modes such as a button image Z30B (rainbow button) in a color different from that of the normal mode button image Z30 may be displayed. ..

  For example, when the execution of any one of the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 in which the operation valid period is set twice is determined as the effect pattern of the button operation effect in the modified example 1, for effect control. The CPU 120 changes the button images displayed in each of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period by, for example, a lottery using random numbers, etc., and changes patterns A-1 to A in the push button mode shown in FIG. 69 (A). Any one of -5 may be determined and the button image may be displayed based on the determined pattern.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 increases the jackpot expectation in the order of the button image Z30 (normal button), the button image Z30A (large button), and the button image Z30C (rainbow button), that is, the change pattern A-1. , A-2, A-3, A-4, A-5, the change patterns A-1 to A-5 may be determined so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher. In addition, the rainbow button image Z30B (rainbow button) may be a big hit confirmation button image that appears only when the variable display result is a big hit.

  Further, in the present modification 2, as the effect pattern of the button operation effect in the modification 1, execution of any of the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 in which the operation valid period is set twice is determined. Only in the case that the push button mode is changed, any one of the change patterns A-1 to A-5 is determined. However, the effect patterns PT-1 and PT-2 in which the operation effective period is set once are exemplified. , PT-4 is determined to be executed, the type of button image displayed in the first operation valid period may be determined according to the variable display result.

  In the second modification, the button image Z30 (normal button) and the button image Z30A (large button) are displayed as the display mode of the button image Z30 as the operation promotion image displayed corresponding to the operation valid period (predetermined period). , The button image Z30C (rainbow button) can be displayed, but in addition to the above, for example, an effect is displayed around the button image Z30, a mode in which the button image Z30 blinks, or the color of the button image Z30 is blue. , Green, red, gold, or a special pattern, or a stick controller 31A instead of a button image may be used.

  In the second modification, the button image Z30 (normal button), the button image Z30A (large button), and the button are displayed as the display mode of the button image Z30 as the operation promotion image displayed corresponding to the operation valid period (predetermined period). Although the form in which the image Z30C (rainbow button) can be displayed has been illustrated, for example, the time gauge image Z34 displayed corresponding to the operation valid period (predetermined period) also has a variable display result like the button image. It may be possible to change to a plurality of types of modes in response. In particular, when the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 in which the operation valid period is set twice are executed, the effect patterns PT-1, PT-2, PT in which the operation valid period is set once are executed. At a higher rate than in the case of -4, the mode of the time gauge image Z34 at the time when the first operation valid period (predetermined period) ends is changed to a mode different from the normal mode, so that the second operation is performed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation regarding the setting of the valid period (predetermined period).

  Also, in the present modification 2, as in modification 3 described later, a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player is applied. In this case, for example, the higher the set value is set, the higher the rate of determining execution of the effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5 when the variable display result is SP reach loss is, so that the big hit. Even if the high expectation effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5 have appeared, even if the variable display result is lost, it is possible to suggest that it is a high setting. Can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Next, a third modified example of the present invention will be described based on FIG. 70A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure display result determination table in the second modification, and FIG. 70B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure display result determination table in the second modification. is there.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Although the game machine which cannot be set to the set value has been described, the present invention is also applied to the game machine which cannot be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. It is possible. Specifically, in the case where "big hit" is included as the special figure display result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the set value (eg, set value "1" to " 6) or the like) can be changed, and the jackpot probability (probability of being a jackpot display result) can be made different according to the value of the set value by the setting change function. (For example, the jackpot probability is 1/250 when the setting value is "6", and 1/320 when the setting value is "1"). That is, the game control means (for example, the CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game may be able to execute the control of the advantageous state (the big hit game state) based on the set value that is set.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display result of the special symbol is one of "small hit" and "miss", but in the present modification 2, a plurality of different advantages for the player When it is possible to set any of the set values (for example, 1 to 6), the display result of the special symbol will be one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss". In addition, for example, it can be realized by changing the number of determination values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “miss” in the special figure display result determination table corresponding to each set value. In the following, for example, in the special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 35, it is used when determining whether the display result of the special symbol is one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss". The display result determination table will be described.

  The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, the individual display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited thereto. A common display result determination table may be used for the drawing and the second special view.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 10935 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the case where the set value is 1 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 42767 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the case where the set value is 2 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 10935 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the case where the set value is 2 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 42767 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the case where the set value is 3 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 10935 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the case where the setting value is 3 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 42767 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the case where the setting value is 4 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 10935 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the case where the set value is 4 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 42767 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the case where the set value is 5 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the low base state or the high base state Is a numerical value that can take a value, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 10935 are the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the case where the set value is 5 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to the “big hit”, and 10,000 to 42767 are assigned to the “small hit”. It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the case where the setting value is 6 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the low base state or the high base state Is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 10935 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the case where the setting value is 6 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range of 0 to 65535 Is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", and 10,000 to 42767 are assigned to the "small hit". It is assigned to “win” and other numerical ranges are assigned to “miss”.

  As described above, in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set as “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. The judgment value is assigned so that Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value, and the small hit game state is set. The probability that the control is determined to be set to 1 is set to 1/70.

  On the other hand, in the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" to be controlled in the small hit game state regardless of the game state and the set value is the first special figure. The determination value is assigned so as to have the same value as that of the display display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as "small hit" regardless of the game state and the set value, and the small hit game state. The probability of being determined to control is set to 1/2.

  As described above, in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the determination value is assigned such that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling the big hit game state is different depending on the set value. That is, while the big hit probability that does not go through the small hit varies according to the set value, the probability that it is decided to control the small hit game state as the "small hit" is the same value Since the determination value is assigned so that, that is, the big hit probability via the small hit is invariable, it is possible to improve the game play while suppressing the gambling performance. If the small hit probability, the big hit type decision probability, the small hit type decision probability, the variation pattern decision probability, etc. differ depending on the set value, for example, in addition to the big hit probability between each set value, the small hit This is because the difference in game performance between the set values becomes excessively remarkable, such as the difference in probability becoming excessive.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is "small hit" and the probability that the small hit game state is determined to be controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled may be changed according to the set value. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure and the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is different is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is set as “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same probability.

  Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination values assigned to “big hit” and “small hit” in each display result determination table, for the first special figure when the game state is the low base state or the high base state In the display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

  When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the “jackpot”), while the setting value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is 1238 to 1253 in the setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 in the setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 in the setting value 4, and 1238 to 1317 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, when the set value is 1, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the winning judgment values to be obtained, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value range of the big hit judging values. Numerical value within the range that is added to the non-common numerical value range is assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1238 as a reference as the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go

  In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range from 10000 to 10935 of the hit determination values is a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the small hitting judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, while 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit judgment value is 10,000 to 10935 in the numerical range different from the big hit judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6 described above, with 10,000 being the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set to a range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  In this way, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is decided to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result being "big hit" is low, and the larger the set value is, The determination value is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "big hit" is high (probability of big hit: set value 6> set value 5> set value 4> set value 3 > Set value 2> Set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit is given to the special symbol. Decide that. Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIG. 70 indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In addition, in the second modification, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as the set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a set value changing function capable of changing the set value such as the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit or the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the set value set. The suggestive effect may be executable at a predetermined timing (for example, during variable display of symbols, during big hit or small hit game state, etc.).

(Explanation about deformation and application)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control of the second special variable winning ball device 7B based on the second pattern performed by the CPU 103 in the case of the small hits 8 and 12 can store a maximum of one support ball in the first control. In the second control after the first control, one support ball can be stored at the maximum, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first control and the second control are possible. In the above, the upper limit number of support balls that can be stored can be variously changed, and two or more support balls can be stored in each of the first control and the second control.

  Further, the upper limit number of support balls that can be stored in the first control and the upper limit number of support balls that can be stored in the second control may be different. For example, by making it possible to store up to 5 support balls in the second control, even if no V winning is generated in the first control, a big hit is generated with a probability of 100% by performing the second control. Therefore, the player's expectation for the second control can be appropriately increased.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the control of the second special variable winning ball device 7B based on the second pattern performed by the CPU 103 in the case of the small hits 8 and 12, once the V winning is not generated in the first control, Although the mode in which the second control is performed after all the support balls are discharged has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the V winning is not generated in the first control, the storage is performed in the first control. The second control may be performed without ejecting the generated support balls. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the number of support balls in the second control, and it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of V winnings as compared with the case of the first control. Therefore, it is possible for the player to perform the second control. Expectation can be suitably increased.

  Furthermore, in the case where two or more support balls can be stored in the first control, a part of the stored support balls (for example, one of the three support balls) is discharged and the rest is stored. You may make it perform a 2nd control as it is.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first control and the second control that allow the game ball to enter the second special winning opening 702B are the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B (for example, shown in FIG. 36 (B)). In addition to the content of (1)), the storage mechanism control including storage and release and discharge of the entered game ball (for example, the content of (2) to (5) shown in FIG. 36B) is included in more detail. Exemplifies a mode including opening control of the second special winning opening 702B and release of storage of the first storage mechanism 204 (lottery and determination for V winning big jackpot), but the present invention is not limited to this. The first control and the second control may be controls that do not include the storage mechanism control as long as they are controls including at least opening control of the second special winning opening 702B. ) At least one of (2) to (5) One (e.g., retention and release of the first storage mechanism 204) may include a. Further, the opening control and the storage mechanism control may each include control of another member or mechanism (for example, rotation control of the rotating body 208).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 1st control shown in FIG.36 (C) and the 2nd control shown in FIG.36 (D) are respectively the opening control of the 2nd special winning opening 702B, and the game ball which entered. Although it is the same in that it includes storage mechanism control including storage and release and discharge, for example, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 702B, the operation pattern and timing of the first storage mechanism 204 and the second storage mechanism 205, etc. Although a different form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 702B, the first storage mechanism 204, and the second storage mechanism are controlled by the first control and the second control. The control such as the operation pattern and timing of 205 may be the same.

  Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to control to the big hit game state based on that the game ball that has entered the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state has passed the specific area (V winning hole 283). The example in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific area changes depending on the number of the game balls stored in the second storage mechanism 205 after entering the second special variable winning ball device 7B has been exemplified. It is not limited to, but based on the game ball that entered the variable means in the big hit game state has passed the specific area, the ratio of the variable display result of the special symbol to the "big hit" is higher than in the normal state In a gaming machine (so-called V-probability variation specification) that can be controlled in a probability variation state in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is executed, a game is played depending on the number of game balls that enter the variable means and are stored by the storage means. Balls proportion passing through a particular region may be changed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine which can execute the next round game by passing the specified area in the round means in one round game in the big hit game state (the so-called two-class gaming machine), the variable means is entered. The ratio of the game balls or the game balls stored by the storage means passing through the specific region may be changed depending on the number of the game balls.

  Further, in the embodiment, in the small hitting game state, the support balls (game balls that cannot pass through the V winning opening 283) enter the second special variable winning ball device 7B and are stored by the second storage mechanism 205. Although the mode in which the proportion of the game balls stored by the first storage mechanism 204 passing through the specific region (V winning opening 283) is changed depending on the number, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined region is provided. It suffices that the rate at which the game balls pass through the specific area changes depending on the number of game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B. That is, the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific area does not have to change depending on the number of game balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205. Further, the game balls that can pass through the specific area may be stored by the storage means, and the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific area may be changed depending on the number of the game balls stored by the storage means.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 has a large number of support balls in the first control (3 support balls in the case of a small number of support balls in the first control (1 support ball is 1) and a small hit of 8, 12). However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the second control is performed at a higher rate (100% probability) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7 and 11. This is not limited to the case where the number of support balls in the first control is small (one support ball is 8) and the number of support balls in the first control is large (for example, the number of support balls is 3). Even if the small hits are 2, 4, 6, 10 or the small hits 7 and 11, the number of support balls in the first control is small (1 support ball), which is lower than the case of the small hits 8 and 12. Even if the second control can be executed if it is a probability There.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 has a large number of support balls in the first control (3 support balls in the case of a small number of support balls in the first control (1 support ball is 1) and a small hit of 8, 12). However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the second control is performed at a higher rate (100% probability) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7 and 11. For example, in the case of small hits 8 and 12 (one opening) in which the number of opening of the second special winning opening 702B is small in the first control, small hits 2, 4, and 6 in which the number of opening in the first control is large. The second control may be performed at a higher rate than in the case of 10 (twice open) and small hits of 7 and 11 (three open).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 exemplifies a form in which the upper limit number of support balls in the first control and the second control is predetermined according to the small hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, for example, it may be determined whether or not the second control is performed according to the number of support balls stored in the first control.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example 1, as an example of the advantageous effect corresponding to the contents advantageous to the player (V winning, big hit, reach, opening of the special winning opening, etc.), the V winning big hit effect and the big hit confirmation notification are given. Although the form to which the effect is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of types of big hits with different numbers of rounds as a big hit type, the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit is notified. Round number notification effect, promotion notification effect to notify that it shifts to a high probability state after the completion of the big hit during the big hit game that became a big hit with a normal big hit pattern that is not a probability fluctuation pattern, or a high probability after the big hit Indication that there is a possibility of being controlled to a high probability state in the state where it is not informed that it will shift to the state By temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during display and then restarting variable display, pseudo continuous production that makes one variable display look like multiple variable displays, and reach (weak) is expected to be a big hit. The present invention can be applied to various productions such as reach-up production that ranks up to high reach (strong) and pre-reading notice production.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the opening period of the 2nd special winning opening 702B was applied as an example of a predetermined period, and the modification 1 illustrated the form which applied the operation effective period of the push button 31B as an example of a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined period may be a period set by the CPU 103, such as the opening period, as long as it is set in association with the advantageous effect. It may be a period set by the effect control CPU 120, such as the operation valid period. Further, the open period may be set in association with the V-prize jackpot effect that is an advantageous effect, or the operation valid period may be set in association with the jackpot confirmation notification effect that is an advantageous effect. ..

  Furthermore, the predetermined period is, in addition to the operation valid period as described above, related to advantageous effects such as continuation of the above pseudo-link, reach-up (reach development), and change of the mode of the hold storage display in the prefetch notice, for example. It may be a production period set after the predetermined period has elapsed and before the advantageous production is executed.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example 1, as the predetermined effect including the update operation (update operation of the time gauge) of the predetermined display corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period, it is a motion promotion effect that promotes the motion of the player. Although a mode in which the promotion effect and the button operation effect in the modified example 1 are applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to be used in effects other than the motion promotion effect for promoting the motion of the player. Good.

  Further, in the second invention, in both the first pattern and the second pattern, the common display mode (predetermined mode) of the predetermined display when the predetermined period has elapsed means that the first pattern and the second pattern. In any of the above, not only the one in which the predetermined display is displayed in the same image, but also the one in which the similar (approximate) image is displayed. For example, in the case of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 of the above-described embodiment and modification 1, if the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 are displayed in a predetermined manner such that the gauge remains in both the first pattern and the second pattern. The remaining amount of the gauge and the color of the gauge may be different. Further, it may be suggested that a new predetermined period may be set according to the remaining amount of the gauge, the color, and the like. The common mode (predetermined mode) is different from the specific mode (MAX mode of the gauge, etc.) that is changed in response to the new setting of the predetermined period in the second pattern (gauge remains). It is preferable that such a mode or a gauge is “0”).

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example 1, in the case of the effect pattern C, the opening period and the operation valid period, which are the predetermined periods, are a specific period (for example, variable display) from the start of one variable display to the end thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute an effect pattern in which a predetermined period is set three or more times in a specific period (for example, a variable display period). May be

  Further, the specific period is not limited to one variable display period as described above, may be a variable display period of a plurality of times, or a period other than the variable display period (for example, control to a big hit gaming state). Period, etc.).

  In addition, in the embodiment and the modification 1, the gauge of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the opening period and the operation valid period), but the present embodiment has been described. The invention is not limited to this, and the gauge may be gradually reduced according to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the gauge is reduced by a predetermined amount each time the predetermined period elapses). ..

  In addition, in the embodiment and the modification 1, the gauge of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the opening period and the operation valid period), but the present embodiment has been described. The invention is not limited to this, and the gauge may be increased according to the rest of the predetermined period.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example 1, the effect pattern C of the winning promotion effect and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5 and PT-6 of the button operation effect are the predetermined time after the predetermined time has elapsed. The example in which the gauge of the time gauge image, which is the predetermined display, is changed to the “MAX” mode (specific mode) at the timing, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined period has elapsed. The display mode of the predetermined display may be changed to the specific mode at the timing.

  In addition, in the embodiment and the first modification, in the predetermined effect including the update operation of the predetermined display corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the opening period and the operation valid period), the remaining period of the predetermined period is corresponded. As an example, the mode in which the gauges of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 are displayed in a reduced manner has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a countdown effect in which a timer image (predetermined display) indicating a predetermined time is displayed in a reduced manner. Alternatively, various effects may be performed in which an effect image (for example, a character, a level gauge, a life gauge, etc.) showing a predetermined period is updated (decreased or increased) according to the remaining period.

  In the case of the countdown effect, for example, the number indicating the time such as “3”, “2”, “1”, “0” may be updated, and when the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined display is performed. When a certain timer image is displayed in such a manner that the predetermined period remains, when the predetermined period elapses, the number "1" or "0" is not erased and the display is continued or the number is displayed blinking. You can do it.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment and the modification 1, 1st pattern (for example, production pattern B / production pattern PT-2, PT-4) and 2nd pattern (for example, production pattern C / production pattern PT-3, PT). -5, PT-6), the predetermined period is newly set by displaying the gauge that is the predetermined display in a common mode (predetermined mode) at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to erase a time gauge image in a predetermined mode in which the gauge becomes “0” at least when a predetermined period elapses. Instead, the display may be continued for a predetermined period to indicate that the predetermined period is newly set.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modification 1, in the case of the second pattern (for example, the production pattern C / the production patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6), the predetermined period is newly added after the lapse of the predetermined period. Corresponding to the setting, the mode in which the gauge, which is the mode when the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 which are the predetermined displays are first displayed, is returned (changed) to the mode (specific mode) of MAX has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the display mode of the gauges of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 is not necessarily returned to the display mode when the display is started, the predetermined period is updated after the predetermined period has elapsed. If the display mode of the predetermined display is changed to the specific mode in response to the setting of, for example, the mode in which the gauge is between "MAX" and "0" (half) or the mode exceeding "MAX" State Also may be changed to, it may be changed to a mode corresponding to the remaining period of the newly set as the predetermined period.

  In addition, the specific mode is, for example, not only those in which the gauge is in the MAX mode or those not in the MAX pattern as described above in the second pattern, but the gauge is in the MAX mode, but the gauge is from blue to red. It may include a mode in which the gauge changes to gold or the like, a mode in which the shape of the gauge largely changes, and the like. That is, the display mode of a part of the predetermined display may be changed. Furthermore, if the second pattern is changed in response to the new predetermined period being set after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, the predetermined period is newly set after the predetermined period has elapsed. In response to this, instead of the time gauge image as the predetermined display, another image such as a timer image may be displayed.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example 1, the effect pattern C and the effect pattern PT-3, in which the predetermined period is newly set after the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B which is the predetermined period or the operation effective period, In the case of PT-5 and PT-6, the form in which the newly set predetermined period is the same as the first set predetermined period has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The predetermined period and the newly set predetermined period may not be the same time, for example, the predetermined period may be the first time and the newly set predetermined period may be the second time different from the first time. Further, the predetermined period has been set in advance for each effect pattern, but after the predetermined period has elapsed, whether or not to newly set the predetermined period may be determined by lottery or the like.

  Further, in the embodiment and the modified example 1, in the case of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern PT-1 in which the predetermined period is not newly set after the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B which is the predetermined period or the operation effective period has elapsed. Although the example in which the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 that are the predetermined display are erased at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new predetermined period is set after the predetermined period has elapsed. Even in the effect pattern A that is not performed or the effect pattern PT-1 of the modified example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is continued even after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is preferable to display it.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second special figure game has a higher win rate than the first special figure game and thus has a higher advantage for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the second special figure game is controlled to be in a high base state B after the big hit is larger than in the first special figure game because the determination rate of the big hit with a larger number of round games is higher than that in the first special figure game. The advantage to the player may be made higher by the fact that the ratio is high and the determination ratio of the small hit types 7 and 11 is higher than that of the first special figure game.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when there is the first pending storage and the second pending storage, the CPU 103 displays the variable display of the second special drawing based on the second pending storage as the first special drawing based on the first pending storage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if there is a first reserved memory and a second reserved memory, a special feature based on the reserved memory in the order of starting winnings is used. The variable display of the figure may be executed, or the variable display of the second special figure based on the second reserved memory and the variable display of the first special figure based on the first reserved memory may be executed simultaneously. Good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of balls used for the game is subtracted, while the number of balls used for the game is added, while the number of balls that are circulated inside and lent out according to the player's lending request and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored and stored. In addition, since points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed gaming machines, these given points and points correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is ended by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. The second invention and the third invention can be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated.

  When applying the second invention and the third invention to the slot machine, the advantageous effect corresponding to the content advantageous to the player is a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small role, or an operation advantageous to the player. A state in which the mode is informed (for example, AT (assist time) state), or a mode in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is informed and the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, ART (assist replay time) state) Including etc. Further, as the predetermined period, an effective period of operation in a button effect executed as a suggestion effect suggesting a possibility of winning a bonus, an AT, or an ART, or a confirmation notification effect can be applied.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 6B Variable winning ball device 7B Second special variable winning ball device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control
204 1st storage mechanism 205 2nd storage mechanism 208 Rotating body 272 V winning ball holding parts 273A to 273E Lost ball holding part 400 Movable passage body

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Variable means capable of changing to an enterable state in which a game medium can enter,
A variable control means capable of controlling the variable means,
Equipped with
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass,
A specific area through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided,
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on that the game medium has passed through the specific region, and the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific region differs depending on the number of game media that have passed through the predetermined region,
The variable control means,
A first pattern that performs a first control that allows a game medium to pass through the predetermined area, and a second pattern that performs a second control that allows the game medium to pass through the predetermined area again after performing the first control. , The variable means can be controlled by any of a plurality of types of patterns including,
In the second pattern, the second control is performed regardless of whether the game medium that has passed the predetermined area by the first control has passed the specific area.

Images